Roland Electronic Keyboard V Synth GT User Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland V-Synth GT.  
201b  
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 4),  
“USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 7). These sections provide important  
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have  
gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Quick Start, Owner’s manual, and Driver  
Installation Guide should be read in its entirety. These manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a  
convenient reference.  
985  
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note,  
however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so  
what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.  
Copyright © 2007 ROLAND CORPORATION  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written  
permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an  
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to  
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR  
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.  
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is  
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).  
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.  
intended to alert the user to the presence of important  
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the product.  
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:  
1. Read these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the  
point where they exit from the apparatus.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.  
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,  
or table specified by the manufacturer, or  
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.  
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,  
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with  
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two  
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the  
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug  
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for  
replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,  
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when  
unused for long periods of time.  
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing  
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any  
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid  
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,  
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does  
not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
For the U.K.  
WARNING:  
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED  
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.  
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying  
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the  
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING THE UNIT SAFELY  
The  
symbol alerts the user to important instructions  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of death or severe  
injury should the unit be used  
improperly.  
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is  
determined by the design contained within the  
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for  
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of injury or material  
damage should the unit be used  
improperly.  
The  
symbol alerts the user to items that must never  
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that  
must not be done is indicated by the design contained  
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it  
means that the unit must never be disassembled.  
* Material damage refers to damage or  
other adverse effects caused with  
respect to the home and all its  
furnishings, as well to domestic  
animals or pets.  
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be  
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is  
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In  
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-  
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.  
001  
006  
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below,  
• When using the unit with a stand recommended by Roland, the  
stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain  
stable. If not using a rack or stand, you still need to make sure  
that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a  
level surface that will properly support the unit, and keep it  
from wobbling.  
and the Owner’s Manual.  
.............................................................................................................................  
001-50  
• Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with  
a protective earthing connection.  
.............................................................................................................................  
.............................................................................................................................  
008a  
002a  
• The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the  
type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on  
the rear side of unit.  
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit.  
.............................................................................................................................  
.............................................................................................................................  
008e  
003  
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the supplied  
power cord must not be used with any other device.  
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it  
(except when this manual provides specific instructions  
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the  
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland  
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.  
.............................................................................................................................  
009  
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place  
heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing  
severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire  
and shock hazards!  
.............................................................................................................................  
004  
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:  
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an  
enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-  
generating equipment); or are  
.............................................................................................................................  
010  
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and  
headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound  
levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate  
for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level  
that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or  
ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit,  
and consult an audiologist.  
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are  
• Humid; or are  
• Exposed to rain; or are  
• Dusty; or are  
• Subject to high levels of vibration.  
.............................................................................................................................  
.............................................................................................................................  
005  
011  
• This unit should be used only with keyboard stand KS-12 that is  
recommended by Roland.  
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,  
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to  
penetrate the unit.  
.............................................................................................................................  
.............................................................................................................................  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
012a  
101a  
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the power cord from  
• The unit should be located so that its location or position does  
the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest  
Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as  
listed on the “Information” page when:  
not interfere with its proper ventilation.  
.............................................................................................................................  
101c  
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or  
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs  
• This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS-12. Use  
with other stands is capable of resulting in instability causing  
possible injury.  
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto  
the unit; or  
.............................................................................................................................  
102b  
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has  
become wet); or  
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when  
plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.  
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a  
marked change in performance.  
.............................................................................................................................  
103a  
.............................................................................................................................  
013  
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the power plug and  
• In households with small children, an adult should provide  
supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules  
essential for the safe operation of the unit.  
clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumu-  
lations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug  
from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for  
an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between  
the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor  
insulation and lead to fire.  
.............................................................................................................................  
014  
• Protect the unit from strong impact.  
(Do not drop it!)  
.............................................................................................................................  
104Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled.  
Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of  
the reach of children.  
.............................................................................................................................  
015  
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an outlet  
with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially  
careful when using extension cords—the total power used by  
all devices you have connected to the extension cord’s outlet  
must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the  
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the  
cord to heat up and eventually melt through.  
.............................................................................................................................  
106  
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.  
.............................................................................................................................  
107b  
.............................................................................................................................  
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when  
plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.  
016  
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your  
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized  
Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.  
.............................................................................................................................  
108a  
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.  
.............................................................................................................................  
023  
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio CD  
.............................................................................................................................  
player. The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause  
permanent hearing loss. Damage to speakers or other system  
components may result.  
109a  
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the  
power cord from the outlet.  
.............................................................................................................................  
026  
.............................................................................................................................  
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases) on  
this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol,  
nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away  
any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.  
110a  
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area,  
pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.  
.............................................................................................................................  
120  
.............................................................................................................................  
• Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any  
device other than condenser microphones that require phantom  
power. You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply  
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio playback  
devices, or other devices that don’t require such power. Be sure  
to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use  
by referring to the manual that came with it.  
(This instrument’s phantom power: 48 V DC, 10 mA Max)  
.............................................................................................................................  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT NOTES  
291b  
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 4–6, please read  
and observe the following:  
Power Supply  
Maintenance  
301  
401a  
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by  
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that  
an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a  
refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner),  
or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the  
electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to  
malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use  
a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter  
has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use  
a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards,  
be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.  
402  
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid  
the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.  
between this unit and the electrical outlet.  
307  
Repairs and Data  
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all  
units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers  
452  
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may be  
or other devices.  
308  
lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be  
backed up on a USB memory, or written down on paper (when  
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.  
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory  
itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore  
the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of  
data.  
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch  
is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely  
disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the  
power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the  
power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into  
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug should be one  
that is within easy reach and readily accessible.  
Additional Precautions  
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost  
Placement  
551  
351  
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing  
as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To  
protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we  
recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important  
data you have stored in the unit’s memory on a USB memory.  
large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem,  
change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the  
source of interference.  
352a  
552Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that  
was stored in the unit’s memory or on a USB memory once it has been  
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of  
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not  
use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.  
352b  
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as  
data.  
cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could  
occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should  
you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless  
devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them  
553  
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,  
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors.  
Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.  
off.  
554Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.  
354a  
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that  
555  
• A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal  
radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject  
it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the  
operation.  
556When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector  
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts,  
unit.  
355b  
• When moved from one location to another where the temperature  
or damage to the cable’s internal elements.  
and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may  
form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt  
to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you  
must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has  
557  
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal  
operation.  
558a  
completely evaporated.  
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume at  
358  
reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not  
need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is  
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be  
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.  
late at night).  
360  
559a  
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which  
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including  
you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface.  
You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent  
this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will  
not slip or move accidentally.  
padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use  
equivalent packaging materials.  
561Use only the specified expression pedal (EV series; sold separately).  
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing  
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMPORTANT NOTES  
562  
Copyright  
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that  
incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables  
can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear.  
For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of  
851  
• Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, performance, or  
broadcast of copyrighted material (musical works, visual works,  
broadcasts, live performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in part  
or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is forbidden  
the cable.  
566a  
• The usable range of D Beam controller will become extremely small  
by law.  
when used under strong direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when  
using the D Beam controller outside.  
852a  
• This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual  
566b  
material without being limited by certain technological copy-protection  
measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be  
used for the purpose of producing original music or video material,  
and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe  
copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own original works)  
• The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the  
location.  
add  
can be recorded or duplicated freely.  
• In order to provide high-quality images, the V-Synth GT uses a TFT  
853  
liquid crystal display. Please be aware that due to the characteristics  
of a TFT liquid crystal display, there may be pixels that fail to light or  
pixels that remain lit, but these are not considered to be malfunctions  
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright  
held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with  
regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through  
your use of this unit.  
or defects.  
add  
• Due to the characteristics of a TFT liquid crystal display, leaving the  
same screen displayed for an extended period of time may cause the  
image to be burned into the screen. To avoid burn-in, we recommend  
that you use the screen saver function (p. 229).  
add  
* MatrixQuest™ 2007 TEPCO UQUEST, LTD. All rights  
reserved.  
Before Using USB Memory  
The V-Synth GT’s USB functionality uses MatrixQuest  
middleware technology from TEPCO UQUEST, LTD.  
Using USB Memory  
204  
708  
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
• USB memories are constructed using precision components; handle  
Corporation.  
the cards carefully, paying particular note to the following.  
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity, be sure to  
discharge any static electricity from your own body before  
handling the USB memory.  
206j  
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating  
system.”  
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact  
portion of the USB memory.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject USB memories to strong shock or  
vibration.  
• Do not keep USB memories in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,  
or other such locations (storage temperature: -20 to 80˚ C: M-  
UF128).  
• Do not allow USB memories to become wet.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the USB memories.  
add  
• Please use Roland M-UF128 as the USB memory device. Some  
commercially available USB memory (2 GB or lower capacity) may  
be usable, but Roland cannot guarantee operation or compatibility for  
individual models. This is due to the fact that manufacturers may  
change the internal circuit design or specifications without notice even  
for identical models of USB memory.  
* The model names of the USB memory devices offered within the  
Roland product lineup are subject to change. For the most recent  
information, please visit the Roland website.  
* As a safeguard against data loss, we recommend that you copy  
the contents of USB memory to your computer as a backup.  
Handling CD-ROMs  
801  
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface) of  
the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly.  
Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Features................................................................................................................16  
Basic Structure .....................................................................................26  
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT..................................................................................33  
Basic Operations in the Touch Panel................................................................33  
Moving the Cursor................................................................................33  
Editing a Value ....................................................................................34  
Common Icons in the Touch Panel ...................................................................36  
Using the Map Function .................................................................................37  
The V-Synth GT’s Four Modes .........................................................................38  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using the E1–E8 Knobs.........................................................................49  
Key Range....................................................................................................68  
Arpeggio......................................................................................................69  
Arpeggio Pattern Edit (Creating an Original Arpeggio Pattern) ..................71  
Effects (Setting Effects for a Patch)....................................................................76  
Routing ...............................................................................................76  
Tone-FX...............................................................................................78  
Chorus................................................................................................78  
Reverb................................................................................................79  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MOD.........................................................................................................115  
MOD Type........................................................................................115  
COSM1/COSM2 .......................................................................................117  
COSM Type ......................................................................................117  
LFO..................................................................................................118  
TVA...........................................................................................................119  
TVA..................................................................................................119  
LFO..................................................................................................120  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Control 2 ..........................................................................................138  
Using Vocal Designer ..................................................................................148  
Sample Mode ..............................................................................................................163  
Sampling....................................................................................................163  
Sample Name (Naming a Sample).......................................................168  
Sample Copy (Copying a Sample) .......................................................169  
Sample Move (Moving a Sample) ........................................................170  
Sample Exchange (Exchanging a Sample).............................................171  
Sample Delete (Deleting a Sample).......................................................172  
Resampling........................................................................................173  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loop Region Settings ..........................................................................185  
Tx.....................................................................................................208  
Time Trip Pad ....................................................................................209  
D Beam.............................................................................................210  
C1/C2 Knob.....................................................................................211  
Bender..............................................................................................212  
Info (Viewing Various Information).................................................................213  
Version (Checking the Version) ............................................................213  
Features (Checking the Functions).........................................................213  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Wallpaper (Changing the Wallpaper) ...........................................................230  
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller...................................233  
Format (Initializing Internal Memory or USB Memory) ......................................234  
Factory Reset (Reset to Default Factory Settings)...............................................235  
MIDI Implementation Chart...........................................................................................236  
Specifications...............................................................................................................237  
Index...........................................................................................................................239  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Use the Documentation  
The V-Synth GT documentation is organized as follows. Refer to the printed documentation or CD-ROM as appropriate  
for your needs.  
Quick Start  
“Quick Start” provides easily understandable, step-by-step explanations that the first-time user will need to know in  
order to play the V-Synth GT. To get a quick understanding of the overall functionality provided by the V-Synth GT,  
please be sure to read this.  
Owner’s Manual  
This is the manual you’re reading.  
It explains all of the V-Synth GT’s functionality. After you’ve read “Quick Start” to get an overall picture of the V-Synth  
GT, read this manual when you need to find out more about individual functions.  
Driver Installation Guide  
This explains how to install the driver that is required for connecting the V-Synth GT to your computer.  
CD-ROM  
Lists of the COSM effects and other effects built into the V-Synth GT are provided in PDF format in the “Effects List” on  
the included CD-ROM. Refer to these lists as needed.  
Conventions used in this manual  
In order to describe operations as clearly as possible, this manual uses the following conventions.  
Text or graphics enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates a button or knob on the panel. For example, [MODE]  
indicates the MODE button, and [  
], [  
], [  
], and [  
] indicate the cursor buttons.  
Text or graphics enclosed in angle brackets < > indicates an item in the screen (touch panel) that you can operate  
with your fingertip. We use the word “touch” to indicate that you are to place your fingertip on the touch panel.  
References such as (p.**) indicate a relevant page to which you can refer.  
Symbols appearing at the beginning of a paragraph have the following meaning.  
indicates a note. Please be sure to read this.  
indicates a memo. Read this as needed.  
indicates a helpful hint. Read this as needed.  
indicates a reference to a related page. Read this as needed.  
The screens shown in this manual are based on the factory settings, but please be aware that there may be some  
differences from the product that is actually shipped.  
Please be aware that the patch names and so on in the screens shown in this manual may differ from the factory  
settings.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Main Features  
The V-Synth GT is a professional synthesizer that brings together Roland’s revolutionary technologies. A variety of sound  
generators, including the latest AP-Synthesis, unique controllers, and a sophisticated user interface are joined in this amazing  
instrument. For any genre or style, the V-Synth GT gives you musically expressive power of an entirely different dimension  
than any previous instrument, with highly usable and playable sounds that are available nowhere else.  
Sound creation power driven by dual-core technology  
A powerful user interface that’s easier to use than ever  
The sound generator engine is now dual-core, delivering  
approximately twice as much simultaneous sound control as  
the previous model of V-Synth. Two tones (Upper and  
Lower) can be combined, letting you use V-Synth sounds  
created with VariPhrase or COSM together with Vocal  
Designer or the newly developed AP-Synthesis to play two  
different types of sounds together.  
The V-Synth GT features a new, high-resolution TFT color  
LCD. This LCD can display a wide range of colors and offers  
a broad viewing angle. Not only is it a delight to view, but  
it also delivers a great leap in discernibility when you’re  
editing sounds. Of course, the LCD is a touch panel, so you  
can directly access an item you want to manipulate. The  
eight knobs located below the LCD are directly linked with  
the parameters shown in the screen, allowing intuitive  
control.  
AP-Synthesis enables a new dimension of  
performance expression  
Frequently used controllers have also been rethought. For  
example, we’ve speeded up operation by unifying the jog  
dial and cursor buttons into a single unit. The arrangement  
of the realtime controllers has also been refined. The V-  
Synth’s distinctive Time Trip pad, the twin D Beam, and  
assignable controller knobs have been brought together in  
one location, letting you access each controller quickly for  
even more aggressive realtime performance.  
The V-Synth GT features a newly developed sound  
generation technology, AP-Synthesis (Articulative Phrase  
Synthesis). By modeling and storing the way in which  
individual acoustic instruments respond to being played,  
this technology goes beyond merely generating “sound,”  
and is able to re-create the nuances and behavior that are  
distinctive to a particular instrument.  
Variations that are possible only for a synthesizer are also  
provided as AP-Synthesis modeling types. This makes it  
possible for you to select truly unique models—for example,  
you could use violin performance techniques to play an  
analog lead synth sound. These sounds can be processed  
through COSM or layered with a VariPhrase sound to  
create new sounds that are not limited to the simulation of  
existing instruments.  
New USB connector for backup media portability  
The USB functionality has also been upgraded on the V-  
Synth GT. A USB MEMORY connector is provided, allowing  
USB memory to be directly connected for data storage. USB  
2.0 support means quick saving or loading of audio files or  
patch data, and easy data transfer with your computer. In  
addition to the USB-MIDI interface functionality provided by  
the previous model, there’s also the capability to transfer  
files via USB, and even realtime transmission and reception  
of audio via the USB-Audio functionality that was a popular  
feature of the V-Synth XT. These capabilities allow powerful  
inter-operation with your computer and DAW software.  
Vocal Designer function that’s highly integrated  
with the synth sound generator  
Since its debut, Vocal Designer has continued to astound  
the music scene with its amazing human vocal emulation.  
Until now, this has been limited to use on its own in the V-  
Synth series, but on the V-Synth GT you can use it  
simultaneously with V-Synth sounds that use VariPhrase or  
modeling OSC, as well as with AP-Synthesis. You can  
create performances that have never been heard before,  
such as a complex pad that interweaves VariPhrase and  
arpeggios, wrapped in a spacey vocal ensemble.  
The microphone input section provides a combo jack, which  
accommodates either a 1/4" phone plug or an XLR  
connector (phantom power is supplied), making it easy to  
connect a variety of microphones.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Ready  
Connecting an Amp and Speaker System  
Since the V-Synth GT contains no amplifier or speakers, you’ll need to connect it to audio equipment such as a  
keyboard amplifier, monitor speaker system or home stereo, or use headphones to hear its sound.  
921  
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the  
power on all devices before making any connections.  
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the INPUT jacks may be  
low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.  
926a  
1. Before hooking anything up, make sure that the power on all of your gear is turned OFF.  
2. Connect the V-Synth GT to your amp/speaker system as shown in the diagram.  
fig.01b-001-e.eps  
Stereo Headphones  
Monitor Speakers  
(powered)  
Mixer etc.  
Power Amplifier  
Use audio cables to connect audio equipment such as an amp or speakers. If you’re using headphones, plug them  
into the PHONES jack.  
Audio cables are not included with the V-Synth GT. You’ll need to provide them.  
In order to fully experience the V-Synth GT’s sound, we recommend using a stereo amp/speaker system. If you’re  
using a mono system, however, make your connections to the V-Synth GT’s MAIN OUT jack L/MONO.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Ready  
Turning On the Power  
941  
Once you’ve made connections correctly (see preceding page), turn on the power using the following procedure.  
Powering up your equipment in the wrong order may cause malfunctions or speaker damage.  
Be careful not to set your listening volume too high to avoid damage to your amp/speaker system or your hearing.  
To ensure proper operation of the pitch bend lever, make sure not to touch the lever when  
turning the V-Synth GT’s power on.  
1. Before turning on the V-Synth GT’s power, consider these two questions:  
• Are all peripheral devices connected correctly?  
• Have the volume controls of the V-Synth GT and all connected audio devices been turned  
to their lowest settings?  
Do not touch!  
2. Turn on the POWER ON switch located on the rear panel of the V-Synth GT.  
fig.01b-002-j.eps  
ON  
OFF  
942  
* This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate  
normally.  
3. Turn on the power for any connected amplifiers or speakers.  
4. Wait for the V-Synth GT to start up. When it has started up normally, a screen like the following will appear.  
fig.patch-ps.eps  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Ready  
5. Adjust the volume appropriately.  
While playing the keyboard to produce sound, adjust the volume of the V-Synth GT and of the connected audio  
equipment.  
fig.01b-003-j.eps  
Turning Off the Power  
• Have the volume controls of the V-Synth GT and all connected audio devices been turned to their lowest  
settings?  
• Have you saved your V-Synth GT sounds or other data you’ve created?  
2. Turn off the power for all connected audio devices.  
3. Turn off the POWER switch located on the rear panel of the V-Synth GT.  
945  
* If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet.  
Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 7).  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Panel Descriptions  
Front Panel  
00b-01.eps  
1
3
8
4
9
5
2
7
12  
13  
10  
6
11  
1
2
TIME TRIP PAD  
D BEAM  
By touching the pad surface with your finger you can apply  
a variety of effects to the sound. (p. 46)  
You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by  
moving your hand. (p. 48)  
Indicator  
This will light when you touch the Time  
Trip Pad.  
Switches to the Time Trip effect.  
Indicators (L, R)  
If the D Beam controller is on, these will  
light when you move your hand over  
the controller.  
[TIME TRIP]  
[ASSIGNABLE]  
Switches to the effect that is specified  
for each tone.  
ON/OFF (TIME TRIP, TIME, PITCH, ASSIGNABLE)  
Switches the D Beam controller on/off. The effect to be  
controlled can be selected by pressing the relevant button.  
[HOLD]  
Switches hold on/off for the effect con-  
trolled by the Time Trip pad.  
Applies the Time Control effect.  
Applies the Pitch Control effect.  
[TIME TRIP]  
[TIME]  
[PITCH]  
Applies the effect that is specified for  
each sound.  
[ASSIGNABLE]  
3
V-LINK  
Enables or disables control of an externally connected V-  
LINK device. (p. 52)  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Panel Descriptions  
4
9
MODE  
ARPEGGIO  
These buttons switch between modes of the V-Synth GT.  
Here you can control the arpeggiator.  
Switches to System mode (p. 193).  
[TEMPO]  
[ON/OFF]  
[HOLD]  
Adjusts the V-Synth GT’s tempo.  
Switches the Arpeggiator hold on/off.  
[SYSTEM]  
[PATCH]  
Switches to Utility mode (p. 214).  
Switches to Sample mode (p. 163).  
[UTILITY]  
[SAMPLE]  
10  
KEYBOARD  
Here you can change the pitch range of the keyboard.  
5
EDIT  
Use these buttons when you want to edit a patch or tone.  
[-OCT], [+OCT]  
[TRANSPOSE]  
These buttons adjust the pitch of the  
keyboard in octave steps. (p. 45)  
Specifies transposing the keyboard in  
semitone steps. (p. 44)  
[SOUND SHAPER II]  
158).  
the desired amount of transposition.  
[PRO EDIT]  
[MENU]  
Opens the Pro Edit screen (p. 85).  
Opens the menu.  
[WRITE]  
Saves the edited content in internal  
memory or USB memory.  
11  
PATCH PALETTE  
Here you can register and recall your favorite patches.  
6
7
VOLUME  
If you hold down this button and press  
Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel  
MAIN OUT jacks and PHONES jack. (p. 18)  
[PATCH ASSIGN]  
PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8], the currently  
selected patch will be registered as a  
favorite patch (p. 42).  
ASSIGNABLE CONTROL  
[BANK]  
[1]–[8]  
You can change the Patch Palette bank  
by holding down this button and press-  
ing PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8].  
These buttons let you select/register  
your favorite patches.  
You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the  
two knobs ([C1], [C2]), and use them to modify the sound  
in realtime. (p. 50)  
[LEVEL]  
Adjust the volume of the upper tone  
and lower tone.  
12  
13  
Display  
[PAN]  
Adjust the stereo position (panning) of  
the upper tone and lower tone.  
for each tone.  
This displays information regarding the operation you are  
performing.  
[ASSIGNABLE]  
E1–E8 knobs  
These knobs adjust the on-screen parameters in real time (p.  
35).  
8
INPUT  
PEAK Indicator  
[MIC LEVEL]  
This will light when the input volume is  
too high.  
Adjusts the volume of the signal input  
through the INPUT jacks on the rear  
panel. (p. 148)  
[ON/OFF]  
[SETTING]  
Switches the mic input on/off.  
Opens the Audio Input Settings screen  
(p. 200).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Panel Descriptions  
00b-02.eps  
21  
23  
22  
16  
14  
15  
17  
19  
20  
24  
25  
26  
18  
Opens the TVA screen.  
[SHIFT] + [TVA]  
14  
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever  
43)  
Opens the Chorus screen.  
Opens the Reverb screen.  
Opens the Tone-FX screen.  
Opens the Arpeggio screen.  
[SHIFT] + [CHO]  
[SHIFT] + [REV]  
[SHIFT] + [TFX]  
[SHIFT] +  
[ARPEGGIO ON/OFF]  
[S1] [S2]  
These will apply the effect specified by AP-Synthesis. With  
the default settings, they switch the violin sound between  
tremolo or pizzicato.  
Opens the Arpeggio Pattern Edit  
screen.  
[SHIFT] +  
[ARPEGGIO HOLD]  
15  
16  
HELP/DEMO  
18  
Numeric Keys  
screens (p. 36).  
You can select a patch by using the numeric keys. Enter a  
number and press [ENTER] to finalize your choice.  
In addition to selecting patches, the numeric keys can also  
be used for numeric input such as selecting tones, effects, or  
waveforms (p. 34).  
VALUE Dial  
This is used to modify values. If you hold down [SHIFT] as  
you turn the VALUE dial, the value will change in greater  
increments. (p. 34)  
[EXIT]  
Return to the previous screen, or close the currently open  
window. In some screens, this causes the currently  
executing function to be aborted.  
[
], [  
], [  
], [  
] (Cursor Buttons)  
Moves the cursor location up/down/left/right. (p. 33)  
[ENTER]  
17  
[SHIFT]  
Use this to finalize a value or execute an operation.  
This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to  
execute various functions.  
19  
[DEC/-], [INC/+]  
Opens the Structure screen.  
These are used to modify values.  
[SHIFT] +  
[STRUCTURE 1-5]  
If you keep on holding down one button while pressing the  
other, the value change accelerates. If you press one of  
these buttons while holding down [SHIFT], the value will  
change in bigger increments. (p. 34)  
Opens the AP-Synthesis screen.  
Opens the Vocal Designer screen.  
[SHIFT] + [AP-Synthesis]  
[SHIFT] +  
[Vocal Designer]  
Opens the OSC1 screen.  
Opens the OSC2 screen.  
Opens the COSM1 screen.  
Opens the COSM2 screen.  
Opens the MOD screen.  
[SHIFT] + [OSC1]  
[SHIFT] + [OSC2]  
[SHIFT] + [COSM1]  
[SHIFT] + [COSM2]  
[SHIFT] + [MOD]  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Panel Descriptions  
20  
24  
KEY MODE  
OSC1, OSC2  
Here you can adjust the oscillator section.  
These knobs are active if the oscillator is on (indicator lit).  
The result of adjusting these knob will depend on the  
oscillator type that is selected.  
TONE [LOWER]  
TONE [UPPER]  
If [SELECT] is unlit:  
These switch the upper tone and lower tone  
on/off. If both are off, there will be no sound.  
If [SELECT] is lit:  
These select the upper tone or lower tone.  
You cannot select both simultaneously.  
[PITCH]  
This modifies the pitch.  
SELECT  
Switches the function of the TONE LOWER/  
UPPER buttons.  
[TIME]/[PW]  
This modifies the  
time.  
TIME  
KEY RANGE  
Opens the Key Range screen, where you  
can make settings for the keyboard (p. 68).  
This modifies the  
pulse width.  
PW  
[FORMANT]/[FAT]  
This modifies the for-  
mant.  
Adjusts the fatness of  
the sound when using  
an analog oscillator.  
FORMANT  
FAT  
21  
STRUCTURE  
Here you can turn each sound-producing element (section)  
on or off.  
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5]  
Switches the structure type (the way in  
which the sections are connected).  
25  
COSM1, COSM2  
Here you can adjust the COSM sections.  
These knobs are active when COSM is on (indicator lit). The  
result of adjusting these knobs will depend on the COSM  
type that is selected.  
[AP-SYNTHESIS],  
[VOCAL DESIGN-  
ER],  
[OSC1], [OSC2],  
[MOD], [COSM1],  
[COSM2], [TVA]  
These buttons switch the correspond-  
ing section on/off.  
[WIDTH]/[CUTOFF]  
WIDTH  
Adjusts the width  
when SBF (Side Band  
Filter) is selected.  
22  
FX (EFFECTS)  
CUTOFF  
If a filter-type COSM  
is selected, this ad-  
justs the cutoff fre-  
quency.  
Here you can switch the onboard effects (Tone effects,  
for its button will light.  
* If any other type is selected, this  
adjusts the parameter assigned to  
the type.  
[TONE FX]  
[CHORUS]  
[REVERB]  
Switches tone effects on and off.  
Switches chorus on and off.  
Switches reverb on and off.  
[DETUNE]/[RESO]  
DETUNE  
Adjusts the detune  
when SBF (Side Band  
RESO  
If a filter-type COSM  
is selected, this ad-  
justs the resonance.  
23  
AP-SYNTHESIS MODIFY knob  
This lets you modify the sound of AP-Synthesis. You can  
specify the parameter that will be modified (p. 124).  
* If any other type is selected, this  
adjusts the parameter assigned to  
the type.  
26  
ENV  
Here you can adjust the TVA section (p. 35).  
When the ENV section’s TVA indicator is on (lit)  
[A]  
[D]  
[S]  
[R]  
This modifies the Attack Time.  
This modifies the Decay Time.  
This modifies the Sustain Level.  
This modifies the Release Time.  
When the ENV section’s SCREEN indicator is on (lit)  
The ADSR sliders shown in the display can be operated  
directly.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Panel Descriptions  
Rear Panel  
00b-03.eps  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
1
2
3
5
6
POWER Switch  
This switch turns the power on/off.  
MIDI Connectors  
IN  
OUT  
THRU  
These connectors can be connected to  
other MIDI devices to receive and  
transmit MIDI messages.  
AC Inlet  
Connect the included power cord to this inlet.  
USB Connectors  
FOOT PEDAL Jacks  
CTRL 1, CTRL 2  
These are USB connectors. They allow the V-Synth GT to be  
connected to your computer to transfer files (p. 221) or to  
transmit and receive MIDI and audio data.  
You can connect optional expression  
pedals (EV series) to these jacks. By as-  
signing a desired function to a pedal,  
you can use it to select or modify sound  
or perform various other control.  
An optional pedal switch (DP series) can  
be connected to this jack for use as a  
hold pedal.  
MEMORY  
You can connect a USB memory device  
to this connector, and load files from the  
USB memory device into the V-Synth GT.  
Use a USB cable to connect this to your  
computer. Both MIDI and audio data  
can be transferred via this connection.  
HOLD  
COMPUTER  
* Use only the specified expression pedal (EV series; sold separately).  
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing  
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.  
* In order to use the USB MIDI and audio functionality, you’ll need to  
install the USB driver in your computer as described in the separate  
“Driver Installation Guide.”  
* Never insert or remove a USB memory while this unit’s power is on.  
Doing so may corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the USB memory.  
7
PHANTOM Switch  
This switch turns the phantom power on/off for the XLR type  
connector of the MIC IN jack.  
* Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is firmly in  
place.  
* Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any device  
other than condenser microphones that require phantom power. You  
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to  
dynamic microphones, audio playback devices, or other devices  
that don’t require such power. Be sure to check the specifications of  
any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that  
came with it. (This instrument’s phantom power: 48 V DC, 10 mA  
Max)  
4
DIGITAL AUDIO Connectors  
OPTICAL IN/ OUT  
COAXIAL IN/OUT  
These connectors input/output a digi-  
tal audio signal (stereo). The output  
signal is identical to the signal that is  
output from the MAIN OUT jacks.  
* It will take some time for the phantom power voltage to drop after  
you turn the switch off.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Panel Descriptions  
8
MIC IN Jack  
This is a mic jack for analog audio signal input.  
It accommodates either XLR type or phone type plugs.  
XLR type connections can provide 48 V phantom power,  
allowing you to connect condenser mics that require  
phantom power. In this case, turn the PHANTOM switch to  
“ON.”  
* This instrument is equipped with balanced (XLR/TRS) type jack.  
Wiring diagrams for this jack are shown below. Make connections  
after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you  
intend to connect.  
fig.XLR/TRSJack.eps  
9
INPUT Jacks  
L
R
An external audio source such as a CD  
for sampling or external input.  
* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of  
equipment connected to the INPUT jacks may be low. If this  
happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.  
10  
DIRECT OUT Jacks  
These jacks output the sound for which  
ment is “DIR.” You can connect to these  
jacks when using an external effects pro-  
cessor or other device.  
L
R
11  
12  
MAIN OUT Jacks  
L/MONO  
R
These jacks output the audio signal to the  
connected mixer/amplifier system in ste-  
reo. For mono output, use the L jack (p.  
17).  
These also feature balanced output.  
PHONES Jack  
This is the jack for connecting headphones (sold  
separately).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
How the V-Synth GT Is Organized  
Basic Structure  
Broadly speaking, the V-Synth GT consists of a controller section and a sound generator section.  
fig.02-01-j  
V-Synth GT  
Sound Generator Section  
Performance  
Controller Section  
(Controllers such as the keyboard and the pitch bend lever)  
Sound Generator Section  
The units of sound that you play on the V-Synth GT are called “patches.” A patch consists of two tones, upper and  
lower. For more about patches and tones, refer to “How Patches and Tones are related” in the Quick Start manual.  
fig.02-02-j  
Patch  
Upper Tone  
Lower Tone  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
Controller Section  
The controller section consists of the keyboard, pitch bend/modulation lever, time trip pad, D Beam controller, C1/C2  
knobs, E1–E8 knobs, S1/S2 buttons, arpeggiator, and pedals connected to the rear panel. When you manipulate  
these controllers, they send performance data to the sound generator section, causing the V-Synth GT to create sound.  
fig.02-03-j  
Controller Section  
(Controllers such as the keyboard and the pitch bend lever)  
Polyphony  
The maximum polyphony of the V-Synth GT depends on the OSC and COSM types used by the patch.  
Changing the effect type or switching effects on/off does not affect the available polyphony.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
About Structures  
The V-Synth GT’s upper tone and lower tone consist of eight elements (sections) that create the sound.  
The way in which these sections are combined is called the structure type.  
To create a tone for the V-Synth GT, you need to start by specifying the structure type. Then, you can edit the parameters  
of each section.  
Structure Type  
You can choose one of five structure types, as follows.  
Structure type  
Explanation  
1
This is the most typical structure.  
Different sounds produced by OSC1 and OSC2 can be mixed  
by MOD, processed through COSM1 using an SBF (Side  
Band Filter) or other process to modify the tonal character, and  
the tone adjusted by the TVF selected for COSM2.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis can be mixed  
into the final result.  
2
3
This structure connects OSC1 and OSC2 asymmetrically, and  
is a good choice when you want to use a modulation type oth-  
er than “MIX” as the modulator. You can use OSC1 and  
COSM1 to create the basics of the sound, use the OSC2  
sound and the MOD selection to add variety, and select TVF  
for COSM2 to adjust the tone.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis can be mixed  
into the final result.  
This structure pairs OSC1 with COSM1 and OSC2 with  
COSM2. For example, you can use the Time Trip pad or other  
controller to morph between the sound created by OSC1 and  
COSM1 and the sound created by OSC2 and COSM2.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis can be mixed  
into the final sound.  
4
5
AP-Synthesis sounds.  
If you select this structure, you’ll be able to perform using Vocal  
Designer.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis can be mixed  
into the final sound.  
To select a structure type, press STRUCTURE [1]–[5].  
You can also select the structure type in the screen (p. 37).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
Section  
There are eight sections, as follows.  
Section name  
Explanation  
OSC1, OSC2  
These sections produce the sound. You can select internal preset waves or waves you’ve  
sampled, or use analog-modeled waves generated by calculations. You can also use exter-  
nal audio input.  
MOD  
In this section, the two audio signals are mixed and modulated.  
COSM1, COSM2  
In these sections you can apply a variety of effects such as filtering. This is similar to effect  
processing, but while a conventional effect processes the final mixed sound, COSM applies  
the effect to each individual note.  
TVA  
AP-SYNTHESIS  
This section generates sound.  
By selecting an instrumental waveform, then applying a phrase model that models the  
unique expression and behavior of a particular instrument, you can create natural as well  
as innovative sounds.  
VOCAL DESIGNER  
This section lets you use Vocal Designer. You can input sound via the mic connector, and  
perform using it.  
After you’ve selected a structure type, you can turn the various section buttons on/off to disable sections you’re not  
using.  
You can also turn sections on/off from within the display (p. 37).  
AP-Synthesis and Vocal Designer can only be turned on for the upper or the lower tone, not for both.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
About Memory  
Memory Structure  
fig.02-04-e.eps  
V-Synth GT  
Internal Memory  
USB Storage  
Computer  
Project  
Patches  
512  
Tones  
896  
Waves  
999  
System  
Factory Reset  
Factory  
Data  
Load  
Save  
Performance  
Temporary Area  
Save  
Load  
USB Memory  
Project  
Patches  
512  
Tones  
896  
Waves  
999  
System  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
Project  
The largest unit of memory used by the V-Synth GT is the project. A project contains up to 512 patches, up to 896  
tones, up to 999 waves, and various system settings.  
The V-Synth GT uses one project at a time.  
Internal Memory  
The V-Synth GT has internal memory that stores a project. When the V-Synth GT is shipped from the factory, this memory  
already contains patch and wave data, but you are free to overwrite any of this. You can always restore the memory  
to the factory-set contents (Factory Reset, p. 235).  
Temporary Area  
When you switch on the V-Synth GT’s power or load a project, the project data is located in an area of memory called  
the temporary area.  
Operations such as sampling or patch editing will affect the data in the temporary area.  
If you simply turn off the power, the edited sample data or patch data will be lost; you must be sure to save it (using  
SAVE/WRITE) if you want to keep it.  
USB Memory  
Internal memory can hold only one project, but you can use commercially available USB memory to store additional  
projects.  
USB Storage  
If you connect the V-Synth GT to your computer via a USB cable, projects, patches, tones, and wave data in the V-Synth  
GT’s internal memory can be saved (backed up) to the hard disk or other media on your computer (p. 221).  
In addition, wave data created on the V-Synth GT can also be used by software running on your computer, or wave  
data created by your computer software can be used on the V-Synth GT.  
Sampling Memory  
the temporary area. With the factory-set project, there is approximately 69 seconds (stereo) / 138 seconds (monaural)  
of sampling memory. If you delete the factory-set waves, you will be able to use a maximum of approximately 380  
seconds (stereo) / 760 seconds (monaural) of sampling memory. However since a maximum of approximately 290  
seconds (stereo) / 580 seconds (monaural) can be saved in internal memory, you will need to use a commercially  
available USB memory if you want to store more samples than this.  
* The above values are for when the sample is encoded using the “LITE” type (p. 188).  
The factory-set waves can be restored using the Factory Reset operation (p. 235) even if they have been erased.  
Factory Data  
The factory data is an area of memory that stores the state of internal memory when the V-Synth GT is shipped from  
the factory. If you’ve erased the factory-set patch or wave data from internal memory, but decide that you would like  
to use it again, you can execute the Factory Reset procedure to bring this data back.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Overview of the V-Synth GT  
About VariPhrase  
What is VariPhrase?  
VariPhrase has the following advantages:  
1. Capable of changing the pitch, rate of time expansion/compression and voice characteristics (formant) on a real-  
time basis.  
2. Allows easy synchronization to tempo and pitch.  
3. A single sample covers an extended range of keys compared to conventional digital samplers.  
4. Retains sound quality, while implementing the above three advantages.  
VariPhrase overcomes many problems that conventional samplers and digital recorders have with audio phrases.  
Typical issues with Digital Samplers and Digital recorders  
• Changing tempo affects Pitch.  
• Changing the pitch of phrases affects tempo and formant of the sound.  
• Limited control of audio phrases. You cannot adjust a partial section of a sound in real-time.  
• Most samplers require multiple samples over limited key ranges for realistic playback of a sound.  
• Samples of the same tempo must be available for performing chords, otherwise the notes of the chord will be  
out of sync.  
• Pitch or tempo changes on Digital samplers tends to degrade audio quality.  
VariPhrase solves all of these problems.  
For more about VariPhrase, refer to “What is VariPhrase?” in Quick Start.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT  
Basic Operations in the Touch Panel  
The V-Synth GT features a touch screen. The touch screen lets you perform a variety of operations by lightly touching  
the screen.  
* The touch screen responds to a light touch. Pressing the touch screen with too much force, or with a hard object, may damage it.  
Be careful not to apply excessive force, and touch it only with your finger.  
Enabling/Disabling the Beep Tone (p. 227)  
Moving the Cursor  
A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for selection. To edit a parameter’s value, move the  
cursor to the value. The cursor is a black rectangle, and the parameter value or item you select with the cursor is  
highlighted (displayed in inverted colors).  
fig.03-01.e.eps  
Cursor  
Cursor Buttons  
Touch Screen  
Directly touch a parameter value to move the cursor.  
Press [  
], [  
], [  
], or [  
] (the cursor buttons)  
fig.03-03.eps  
to move the cursor.  
fig.03-02.eps  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT  
Editing a Value  
To edit a value, you can use the VALUE dial, [INC/+] [DEC/-], or drag on the touch screen.  
• In each V-Synth GT screen, you can select a value using the cursor as described earlier, and modify its value.  
• Each parameter has its own range of possible values. You cannot set any value smaller than the minimum  
value or greater than the maximum value.  
VALUE Dial  
Touch Screen  
Turning the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value,  
Touch a parameter value, and drag your finger up/down  
and turning it counterclockwise decreases its value. Hold  
down [SHIFT] as you move the VALUE dial to increase  
value increments to make large value changes more  
quickly.  
or left/right. Dragging upward or to the right increases  
the value, and dragging downward or to the left  
decreases the value.  
fig.03-06.eps  
fig.03-04.eps  
[INC/+] and [DEC/-]  
Numeric Keys  
Press [INC/+] to increase the selected value, and [DEC/  
-] to decrease it. Keep the button pressed for continuous  
adjustment. For faster value increases, keep [INC/+]  
pressed down and press [DEC/-]. To decrease values  
quickly, keep [DEC/-] pressed down and press [INC/+].  
You can select a patch by using the numeric keys. Enter  
a number and press [ENTER] to finalize your choice.  
In addition to selecting patches, the numeric keys can  
also be used for numeric input such as selecting tones,  
effects, or waveforms.  
fig.03-05.eps  
Here’s how to enter a numeric value in a value box.  
• [0]–[9] buttons: Enter numerals.  
• [ENTER] button: Finalizes the value you entered.  
• [EXIT] button: Cancels the value you entered.  
For some parameters, it may not be possible to enter a  
value correctly using the numeric keys.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT  
E1–E8 Knobs  
Envelope Sliders  
If the small numbers 1–8 are shown in the display,  
you can use the E1–E8 knobs to control the  
corresponding parameters.  
fig.03-08.eps  
Lit  
You can use the envelope sliders to edit the ADSR  
values of the TVA section (p. 119).  
[A]  
[D]  
[S]  
[R]  
This modifies the Attack Time.  
This modifies the Decay Time.  
This modifies the Sustain Level.  
This modifies the Release Time.  
When the ENV section’s SCREEN indicator is on (lit)  
The ADSR sliders shown in the display can be  
operated directly.  
fig.03-09-j.eps  
Lit  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT  
Common Icons in the Touch Panel  
The V-Synth GT’s touch panel contains certain icons that perform common operations regardless of the scene.  
In many cases you can also use the panel buttons to perform these operations, but it’s worth knowing about these icons,  
since they allow you to complete an operation from within the touch panel.  
fig.03-10.eps  
Search  
ON/OFF  
HELP  
When you touch this icon, a new window will open, displaying a choice of values  
(such as a patch list or tone list) that are available in that situation. To select a  
value, you can turn the VALUE dial, use the [INC/+] [DEC/-] keys, or directly  
touch an item in the touch panel.  
fig.03-11.eps  
fig.03-12.eps  
fig.03-16.eps  
fig.03-17.eps  
fig.03-13.eps  
This turns a function on/off. When you touch this icon to turn it on, the button will  
light green.  
If this icon is lit green, you can touch the icon to open the Help window. This win-  
dow will display a simple explanation of the function or procedure.  
EXIT  
When you touch this icon you will return to the previous screen. You can also re-  
turn by pressing the V-Synth GT’s [EXIT] button.  
MAP  
Since the V-Synth GT gives you a wide range of sound-creating elements, you may  
lose track of the section you’re currently editing. If so, you can press this button to  
open the V-Synth GT Map window, which will show you the currently selected  
structure and the section you’re editing.  
MENU  
Opens the pulldown menu.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Operation of the V-Synth GT  
Using the Map Function  
Since the V-Synth GT lets you edit many different aspects of the sound, you may lose track of what you’re currently  
editing in a patch or tone.  
If so, you can use the Map function to open the V-Synth GT Map window, which will show you the currently selected  
structure, and the section you’re editing within that structure.  
From this screen you can also change the structure, or turn various functions on/off, so there’s no danger of becoming  
lost in an enormous number of parameters.  
1. Touch <MAP>.  
The V-Synth GT Map window will appear.  
fig.06b-03-j.eps  
<MAP>  
2. This shows the overall structure and the section you’re currently editing.  
fig.06b-04-j.eps  
Section being edited  
and selected parameter  
Switch on/off and jump  
Structure selected for the Upper tone  
Structure selected for the Lower tone  
Patch-related screen  
The icon that indicates each section will show the parameter that is selected.  
When is selected:  
You can touch the icon in the panel to turn that section on/off.  
When is selected:  
You can touch the icon in the panel to jump directly to the corresponding parameter setting screen.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The V-Synth GT’s Four Modes  
The V-Synth GT provides a large number of functions, which are organized into four operating modes: Patch mode,  
Sample mode, System mode, and Utility mode.  
Patch Mode (p. 39)  
System Mode (p. 193)  
fig.patch-ps.eps_50  
fig.system.eps_50  
When you press [PATCH], you’ll be in Patch mode.  
When you press [SYSTEM], you’ll be in System mode.  
In this mode you can play patches from the keyboard,  
and edit patch settings.  
Here you can make settings that affect the V-Synth GT’s  
operating environment, such as tuning and how MIDI  
messages will be received.  
Sample Mode (p. 163)  
Utility Mode (p. 214)  
fig.sample-ps.eps_50  
fig.utility-ps.eps_50  
When you press [SAMPLE], you’ll be in Sample mode.  
When you press [UTILITY], you’ll be in Utility mode.  
Here you can make various settings for the V-Synth GT.  
In this mode you can sample waves that can be used as  
the basis of sound creation, or edit waves you’ve  
sampled.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
About the Patch Play Screen  
When you press [PATCH], you’ll be in Patch mode, and the Patch Play screen will appear.  
fig.04-01-j.eps  
Lists the patches.  
Indicates/specifies the tempo.  
Opens the Arpeggio setting screen (p. 69).  
Indicates/specifies  
the number and name  
of the selected patch.  
Opens the V-Synth GT Map screen.  
Opens the Help screen.  
Opens the Patch menu.  
Indicates the category of the patch.  
Shows information about  
the lower tone used  
by the selected patch.  
Shows information about  
the upper tone used  
by the selected patch.  
Shows the parameters assigned  
to the E1–E8 knobs, and their values.  
A patch consists of two tones, and you can use the following portions of the screen to control each tone.  
fig.04-02-j.eps  
Turns the lower tone on/off.  
Turns the upper tone on/off.  
Use the C1 or C2 knob to adjust  
the level.  
Indicates the tone number, name,  
and category.  
Indicates the name of the structure.  
Touch this to open the structure  
setting screen.  
Opens the Multi Step Modulator screen (p. 142).  
Opens the Pro Edit screen (p. 85).  
Opens the Sound Shaper II screen (p. 158).  
Opens the tone list.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Selecting a Patch  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
fig.04-03-j.eps  
Patch Number  
Patch Name  
Patch Category  
Search Button  
2. Move the cursor to the patch number, either by using the cursor buttons or by touching the patch number  
indication (the patch name field will light).  
• Turn the VALUE dial  
• Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]  
• Drag on the touch panel  
• Use the numeric keys to directly enter a patch number (p. 34)  
For example, if you want to select patch number 123, consecutively press numeric keys [1], [2], and [3], and  
then press [ENTER] to finalize your selection.  
“Selecting Patches from the List” (p. 41)  
“Selecting Favorite Patches (Patch Palette)” (p. 42)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Selecting Patches from the List  
You can display a list of patches and select a patch from that list.  
1. In the upper left of the screen, touch the search button.  
The Patch List window appears.  
fig.04-30-e.eps  
Category Search Area  
Keyword Search Area  
2. Select a patch from the list.  
Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/+] [DEC/-] to select a patch. You can also select a patch by touching it on  
the display.  
If you select a patch in the list and play the keyboard, the selected patch will sound. This is a useful way to audition  
the sound of a patch.  
By turning the [E8] knob you can scroll the list rapidly.  
3. Touch <OK>.  
The patch is selected and the Patch List window closes.  
Selecting Patches by Category  
Touch the <Category Search Area> to open the Category Search palette. Here you can view only the patches of  
the category you specify, allowing you to quickly find the patch you want.  
To return to viewing all patches, touch <  
>.  
Selecting Patches by Keyword  
Touch the <Keyword Search Area> to open the virtual keyboard. When you type a keyword and touch <ok>,  
only the patches that include the specified keyword will be displayed, allowing you to quickly find the patch you  
want.  
To return to viewing all patches, touch <  
>.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Selecting Favorite Patches (Patch Palette)  
Favorite patches you use frequently can be registered in the Patch Palette. This allows you to quickly select favorite  
patches that are stored in the V-Synth GT.  
For details on registering a patch in the patch palette, refer to “Registering a Favorite Patch (Patch Palette)” (p.  
42).  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Press PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8] to select a patch.  
fig.04-04.eps  
3. If you want to switch patch palette banks, hold down [BANK] and press PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8].  
[8]) will blink.  
Registering a Favorite Patch (Patch Palette)  
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used patches in one place by registering them into the patch  
palette. By using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from internal memory. You can register a total of  
64 sounds (8 sounds x 8 banks) as favorite sounds.  
For details on how to select patches that are registered in the patch palette, refer to “Selecting Favorite Patches  
(Patch Palette)” (p. 42).  
1. Access the Patch Play screen, and select the patch that you wish to register (p. 40).  
2. Hold down [BANK] and press a PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8] to select the bank in which you wish to register the sound.  
When you press [BANK], the indicator of the currently selected bank button (NUMBER [1]–[8]) will blink.  
3. Hold down [PATCH ASSIGN] and press a PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8] to select the button at which you wish to register  
the sound.  
When the display indicates “Registration Completed!,” registration has been completed.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Applying Various Effects to the Sound  
Varying the Velocity or Aftertouch  
The force with which you play the keyboard, or the “velocity” with which you play, can affect the volume or timbre of  
a sound. Aftertouch—downward pressure you apply to a key after playing a note—can also affect the sound.  
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever  
While playing the keyboard, move the lever to the left to lower the pitch of the currently selected patch, or to the right  
to raise its pitch. This is known as pitch bend. You can also apply vibrato and so on by gently pushing the lever away  
from you. This is known as modulation. For AP-Synthesis, this lever will apply the effect that is assigned.  
If you push the lever away from you and at the same time move it to the right or left, you can apply both effects at once.  
fig.04-10.eps  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Transpose (Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps)  
Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones.  
This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score.  
1. While holding down [TRANSPOSE], press [+OCT] or [-OCT] to transpose the keyboard.  
Pressing [+OCT] once while holding down [TRANSPOSE] will raise the keyboard one semitone.  
Pressing [-OCT] once while holding down [TRANSPOSE] will lower the keyboard one semitone.  
2. To turn off Transpose, press [TRANSPOSE] once again so that its indicator goes off.  
The Transpose setting you make will be maintained.  
There is a single Transpose setting (Setup parameter) for the entire V-Synth GT. The changed setting will be  
remembered even if you switch patches.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Octave Shift (Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units)  
The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave units (-3– +3 octaves).  
For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand, transpose the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves.  
1. Press [+OCT] or [-OCT] and its indicator will light.  
Pressing [+OCT] once will raise the keyboard 1 octave.  
Pressing [-OCT] once will lower the keyboard 1 octave.  
There is a single Octave Shift setting (Setup parameter) for the entire V-Synth GT. The changed setting will be  
remembered even if you switch patches.  
2. To cancel Octave Shift, continue pressing the opposite button until the indicator goes out.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Applying an Effect by Touching Your Finger to the Pad (Time Trip Pad)  
You can apply a variety of effects by touching your fingertip to the Time Trip pad located at the left side of the V-Synth  
GT’s panel.  
What is the Time Trip Function?  
One of the advantages of VariPhrase (p. 32) is that the playback location and speed of the wave can be changed  
function. While playing the keyboard, touch the Time Trip pad and the currently sounding wave will stop at the  
current playback location. Then as you move your finger from that point in a circle, the wave playback will advance  
in the direction of conventional playback (clockwise), or the reverse (counterclockwise). Unlike “scratching” on a  
turntable, this lets you control the playback without affecting the pitch, so you can play the sound at the pitch you  
specify from the keyboard.  
You can use the D Beam controller to produce similar results.  
The Time Trip pad will have an effect if PCM is selected as the oscillator (OSC1/OSC2) (p. 95) and the “Time  
Trip Sw (Time Trip Switch)” (p. 99) is on.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Choose the function that you want to control from the Time Trip pad, and press the TIME TRIP PAD button for that  
function.  
fig.04-15.eps  
[TIME TRIP]  
Applies the Time Trip effect.  
[ASSIGNABLE]  
Applies the effect that is specified by each tone.  
If [ASSIGNABLE] is on, the effect is applied via matrix control. This means that matrix control  
settings must be made separately. Set the matrix control Source to “PAD-X” or “PAD-Y,” and  
specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination. For details on these settings, refer to  
“Matrix Control” (p. 91).  
By setting matrix control Source to “TRIP-R,” you can apply the Time Trip effect and the matrix  
control effect simultaneously. In this case, turn [TIME TRIP] on.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
3. While you play the keyboard to produce sound, place your fingertip on the Time Trip pad and move your finger  
in the following way.  
If [TIME TRIP] is on  
The effect will be applied when you move your finger in a circle on the Time Trip pad.  
fig.04-16.eps  
If you are using matrix control as well, the effect will be applied when you move your finger from the circumference  
of the Time Trip pad toward the center.  
fig.04-17.eps  
If [ASSIGNABLE] is on  
The effect will be applied when you move your finger up/down/left/right on the Time Trip pad.  
fig.04-18.eps  
• By pressing TIME TRIP PAD [HOLD], you can cause the effect to be held even after you take your  
finger off the Time Trip pad.  
• The Time Trip Pad settings are saved with each patch. This means that you can create patches that  
contain Time Trip Pad settings you like.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Applying an Effect by Passing Your Hand Over the D Beam  
The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it. It can be used to apply various effects,  
depending on the function that is assigned to it. You can also create effects in which the sound changes instantaneously,  
in a way that would not be possible by operating a knob or the bender lever.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
function to turn on the D Beam controller.  
fig.04-19.eps  
[TIME TRIP]  
[TIME]  
[PITCH]  
Applies the Time Trip effect (p. 46).  
Applies the time control effect.  
Applies the pitch control effect.  
[ASSIGNABLE]  
Applies the effect that is specified by each tone.  
By turning [ASSIGNABLE] on, you can apply the effect that is specified by each patch. In  
this case, however, unlike the other three functions, simply pressing the button to turn it on  
will not apply an effect. You will also need to make matrix control settings. Set the matrix  
control Source to “BEAM-L” or “BEAM-R,” and specify the parameter to be controlled in  
Destination. For details on these settings, refer to “Matrix Control” (p. 91).  
down.  
Effects will be applied to the sound according to the button you pressed in step 2.  
4. To turn off the D Beam controller, once again press the button that you pressed in step 2, so its indicator goes out.  
• The D Beam controller settings are saved with each patch. This means that you can create patches  
that contain D Beam settings you like.  
• By assigning a MIDI controller number to the D Beam controller, you can use the D Beam to control  
an external MIDI device that is connected. For details, refer to “1–4 Assign L, R (D Beam 1–4  
Assign L, R)” (p. 205).  
The usable range of the D Beam controller  
fig.04-20.eps  
The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller. Waving your hand outside  
this range will produce no effect.  
The D BEAM indicator will light when the D Beam controller is responding. The D BEAM indicator will  
not light if you are outside the valid range of the D Beam controller.  
The usable range of the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong  
direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Using the E1–E8 Knobs  
You can modify the sound in real time by turning the E1–E8 knobs to control the functions assigned to the knobs.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. While playing the keyboard to produce sound, turn the E1–E8 knobs.  
When you turn a knob, the sound will change according to the function that is assigned to that knob.  
You can check what function is assigned to a particular knob by viewing the eight knobs shown in the screen.  
fig.04-22.eps  
You can use the Utility menu to edit the assignments that the E1–E8 knobs will perform in the Patch Play screen (p.  
228).  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Using the Assignable Controllers  
You can turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs to modify the sound in real time.  
The assignable controllers use matrix control to apply effects to the sound. This means that you will need to make matrix  
control settings separately. Set the matrix control Source to “KNOB1” or “KNOB2,” and specify the parameter to be  
controlled in Destination. For details on this setting, refer to “Matrix Control” (p. 91).  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Press [ASSIGNABLE].  
If you press [LEVEL] or [PAN], the knobs will adjust the level or pan of the upper and lower tones.  
3. While playing the keyboard to produce sound, turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs ([C1], [C2]).  
The sound will change according to the function assigned to each knob.  
fig.04-21.eps  
By assigning MIDI controller numbers to the assignable controllers, you can turn [C1] or [C2] to control an external  
MIDI device that is connected. For details, refer to “C1/C2 Knob” (p. 206).  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
Arpeggiator  
Playing Arpeggios  
The V-Synth GT comes with an arpeggiator that can play arpeggios automatically. Once you turn on the arpeggiator,  
the keys you press will automatically be played as an arpeggio.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to make the indicator light.  
The arpeggiator is turned on.  
3. Play the keyboard.  
The V-Synth GT arpeggiates what you’ve played.  
4. To adjust the tempo of the arpeggio, turn ARPEGGIO [TEMPO].  
Turning the knob toward the right will speed up the tempo, and turning it toward the left will slow down the tempo.  
5. To finish playing arpeggios, press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] again so the indicator turns off.  
Holding an Arpeggio  
By using the following procedure, you can produce arpeggios even without continuing to press the keyboard.  
1. Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn the Arpeggiator on.  
2. Press ARPEGGIO [HOLD] to make the indicator light.  
3. Play the keyboard.  
4. If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held, the arpeggio will change accordingly.  
5. To cancel Arpeggio Hold, press ARPEGGIO [HOLD] again.  
When Using a Hold Pedal  
If you play an arpeggio while pressing the hold pedal, the arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the  
keyboard.  
1. Connect an optional pedal switch (DP series) to the HOLD PEDAL jack.  
2. Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn the Arpeggiator on.  
3. Play the keyboard while pressing the hold pedal.  
4. If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held, the arpeggio will change accordingly.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Patch Mode (Playing in Patch Mode)  
V-LINK (Synchronizing Music and Video While You Play the V-Synth GT)  
The V-Synth GT lets you use the pitch bend/modulation lever, Time Trip pad, D Beam controller, and C1/C2 knobs to  
control an externally connected video device that supports V-LINK. This means that your performance on the V-Synth  
can control not only sound but also images, producing sound and video effects that are linked to your playing.  
V-LINK (  
) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to  
connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual effects  
that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.  
Example Connections  
fig.04-41-j.eps  
V-Synth GT  
CG-8  
Remote Function  
(V-LINK)  
MIDI Cable  
Video Output  
Display or Projector  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Enter V-LINK Mode  
1. Press [V-LINK] so the indicator lights.  
V-Synth GT will enter V-LINK mode.  
For details on how to assign V-LINK functions to the controllers, refer to “V-LINK Settings” (p. 208).  
2. To exit V-LINK mode, press [V-LINK] once again so the indicator goes out.  
V-LINK Functions that the V-Synth GT Can Control and MIDI Messages  
You can assign the following functions to the V-Synth GT’s controllers to control a V-LINK compatible video device.  
V-LINK function  
Playback Speed  
Transmitted MIDI message  
CC 10 (Panpot)  
Dissolve Time (amount time the video clips overlap)  
Audio Level (Volume of audio playback)  
Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
Brightness  
CC 5 (Portamento Time)  
CC 7 (Volume)  
CC 72 (Release)  
CC 71 (Resonance)  
CC 74 (Cutoff)  
VFX1 (Visual Effects 1)  
VFX2 (Visual Effects 2)  
VFX3 (Visual Effects 3)  
VFX4 (Visual Effects 4)  
Output Fade  
CC 1 (Modulation)  
CC 91 (Reverb)  
CC 94 (Celeste)  
CC 95 (Phaser)  
CC 73 (Attack)  
T Bar  
Dual Stream  
CC 11 (Expression)  
CC 64 (Hold 1)  
Time Trip  
CC 92 (Tremolo)  
CC 93 (Chorus)  
Palette1–8 (Selecting a palette)  
Clip1–8 (Selecting a video clip)  
CC 0 (Bank Select): 00H–07H  
Program Change: 00H–07H  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
With the V-Synth GT, you have total control over a wide variety of settings.  
Creating a Patch  
1. Access the Patch Play screen, and select the patch that you want to edit (p. 40).  
If you want to create all your patches from the ground up, rather than the patches that have already been prepared,  
carry out the Initialize operation (p. 62).  
2. Select the tones that you want to use for the upper tone and lower tone (p. 55).  
3. Apply effects (chorus and reverb) (p. 76).  
4. Save the patch (p. 58).  
When you carry out a save, any data previously stored at the save destination will be overwritten and lost.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Selecting a Tone  
Specifying the Upper Tone and Lower Tone  
A patch consists of an upper tone and a lower tone. When selecting a tone, you must first specify which one you’re  
selecting—upper or lower.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Touch <Lower Tone> or <Upper Tone> to select the tone you want to specify.  
Alternatively, press [SELECT] so it’s lit, then press [TONE LOWER]/[TONE UPPER].  
fig.05-01-j.eps  
Lower Tone  
Upper Tone  
Tone Switch  
Tone Switch  
If you don’t want the lower or upper tone to be sounded, touch the tone switch to turn it off.  
Alternatively, press [SELECT] so it’s not lit, then press [TONE LOWER]/[TONE UPPER] to turn off a tone.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Selecting a Tone  
Once you’ve specified either the upper or lower tone, you can select the tone.  
fig.05-02-j.eps  
Tone Number  
Tone Name  
Tone Category  
Search Button  
1. Move the cursor to the tone number, either by pressing the cursor buttons, or by touching the tone number  
indication.  
2. Select the desired tone number.  
You can use any of the following methods to select a tone number.  
• Turn the VALUE dial  
• Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]  
• Drag your fingertip on the touch panel  
• Use the numeric keys to directly enter a tone number (p. 34)  
For example, if you want to select tone number 123, consecutively press numeric keys [1], [2], and [3], and  
then press [ENTER] to confirm your selection.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Selecting a Tone from a List  
You can view a list of tones and select a tone from the list.  
1. Touch the search button.  
The Upper (or Lower) Tone List window will appear.  
fig.05-05-e.eps  
Category Search Area  
Keyword Search Area  
2. Choose a tone from the list.  
Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/+] [DEC/-] to choose a tone. You can also choose a tone by directly  
touching it in the touch panel.  
By turning the [E8] knob you can scroll the list rapidly.  
3. Touch <OK>.  
The tone will be selected and the Upper (or Lower) Tone List window will close.  
Selecting Tones by Category  
Touch the <Category Search Area> to open the Category Search palette. Here you can view only the tones of the  
category you specify, allowing you to quickly find the tone you want.  
To return to viewing all tones, touch <  
>.  
Selecting Tones by Keyword  
Touch the <Keyword Search Area> to open the virtual keyboard. When you type a keyword and touch <ok>,  
only the tones that include the specified keyword will be displayed, allowing you to quickly find the tone you want.  
To return to viewing all tones, touch <  
>.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Patch Menu  
Patch Write (Saving Patches)  
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound.  
If you want to keep the modified sound, you must save it in the internal (internal memory).  
When you modify the settings of a patch, the Patch Play screen will indicate “*.” Once you save the patch into internal  
memory, the “*” indication goes away.  
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost. However,  
the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Factory Reset (p. 235).  
1. Make sure that the patch you wish to save is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.05-03.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Patch Write>.  
The Patch Write window appears.  
fig.05-04-ps.eps_50  
4. Turn the VALUE dial to specify the save-destination patch.  
• If you touch “Write Upper Tone” or “Write Lower Tone” to add a check mark, the tone(s) used in the patch  
will also be saved.  
• When you touch <Search>, the Patch Write Number List window will appear, allowing you to select the  
save-destination patch from the list.  
5. Touch <OK> to execute the Save operation.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Patch Name (Naming a Patch)  
Assign a new name to the patch before you save it. You can assign a name of up to twelve characters to the patch.  
1. Make sure that the patch that you want to name is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.05-03.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Patch Name>.  
The Patch Name window appears.  
fig.05-06-ps.eps_50  
4. Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
< << >< >> >  
<shift>  
<clear all>  
<back space>  
<delete>  
Erases all characters in the text box.  
Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
5. When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the patch name.  
If you want to return to the original unedited name, touch <EXIT>.  
* You will lose your edited patch settings if you switch to another patch or turn off the power. If you want to keep a patch whose  
settings you have edited, then perform the Save operation (p. 58).  
* You can also assign a category to each patch (p. 60).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Patch Category (Assigning the Category of a Patch)  
If you assign a category to your patches, you’ll be able to search for them by category in the Patch List window.  
If no category is assigned to a patch, its category name will be “No Assign.”  
1. Make sure that the patch that you want to category is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.05-03.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Patch Category>.  
The Patch Category window appears.  
fig.05-07-ps.eps_50  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
4. Select a category from the list.  
Patch Category List  
Category  
Contents  
No Assign  
No Assign  
Synth  
Synth  
Lead  
Lead  
Pad, Strings  
Vox, Choir  
Pad/Strings  
Voice/Choir  
Piano, Keyboards  
Bass, Guitar  
Winds  
Piano/Keyboards  
Bass/Guitar  
Winds  
Bell, Mallet, Hit  
Melodic Sequence  
Rhythmic Sequence  
Arpeggio  
Bell/Mallet/Hit  
Melodic (i.e., pitched) sequences  
Arpeggio  
FX, Noise, Ambient  
Ethnic  
Effect/Noise/Ambient  
Ethnic  
Drum, Perc  
Combination, Others  
Drum/Percussion  
Combinations using zones (p. 88)/other  
5. Touch <OK> to finalize the category.  
* You will lose your edited patch settings if you switch to another patch or turn off the power. If you want to keep a patch whose  
settings you have edited, then perform the Save operation (p. 58).  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Patch Init (Initializing the Patch Settings)  
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected patch to a standard set of values.  
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected patch; the patches that are stored in internal memory  
and temporary area will not be affected. If you wish to restore all of the V-Synth GT’s settings to their factory values,  
perform a Factory Reset (p. 235).  
1. Access the Patch Play screen, and select the patch that you wish to initialize (p. 40).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.05-03.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Patch Init>.  
A window like the following appears.  
fig.05-09-ps.eps_50  
4. If you also want to initialize the tones used in the patch, check the boxes for the tone(s) you want to initialize.  
5. Touch <OK>.  
The initialization will be carried out.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Patch Common (Settings Shared by the Entire Patch)  
Here we’ll explain the parameters that are used in common by the entire patch (Patch Common parameters).  
Editing the Patch Common Parameters  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.05-03.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Patch Common>.  
The Patch Common screen appears.  
fig.05-11-ps.eps_50  
4. The parameters are organized into several editing groups. Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
select the edit group containing the parameters you want to set.  
5. Touch one of the tabs in the left of the screen to select the desired editing screen.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
6. In each screen, touch the touch panel to edit the parameters.  
Move the cursor to the value box of the parameter you want to edit, and use any of the following methods to edit it.  
• Turn the VALUE dial  
• Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]  
• Drag your fingertip on the touch panel  
7. Repeat steps 4–6 to edit the patch common parameters.  
Changes you make by editing the patch common parameters are temporary, and will be lost if you turn off the  
power. If you want to keep the changes you made, you must save them to the V-Synth GT’s internal memory (p. 58).  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Common (Settings Used by the Entire System)  
General  
fig.05-20-j.eps_50  
In this screen you can turn  
the upper/lower tones on/off,  
change each tone, and adjust  
the level and pan.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Patch Level  
Patch Coarse Tune  
0–127  
-48– +48  
Specifies the volume of the patch.  
Adjusts the pitch of the patch’s sound up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 oc-  
taves).  
Lower Level  
Lower Pan  
0–127  
L64–0–63R  
Specifies the volume of the lower tone.  
Specifies the panning of the lower tone. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and  
“63R” is far right.  
Upper Level  
Upper Pan  
0–127  
L64–0–63R  
Specifies the volume of the upper tone.  
Specifies the panning of the upper tone. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and  
“63R” is far right.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Time Trip Pad  
fig.05-21.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pad Mode  
Time Trip  
Assignable  
OFF, ON  
Applies the Time Trip effect (p. 46).  
Applies the effect that is specified by each tone.  
Specifies whether the current value will be maintained (ON) when you re-  
move your finger from the Time Trip pad, or not maintained (OFF).  
(Time Trip Pad Mode)  
Hold Switch  
(Time Trip Pad Hold Switch)  
For details on settings for the Time Trip effect, refer to “Matrix Control” (p. 91) and “Time Trip Pad” (p. 204).  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
D Beam  
fig.05-22.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
D Beam (D Beam Mode)  
OFF  
The D Beam controller will not be used.  
Time Trip  
Time  
Pitch  
The D Beam controller will control the Time Trip effect (p. 46).  
The D Beam controller will control the Time Control effect.  
The D Beam controller will control the Pitch Control effect.  
The D Beam controller will control the effect specified for each tone.  
Assignable  
For details on how to specify the effect that will be controlled when  
“Assignable” is selected, refer to “Matrix Control” (p. 91).  
S1/S2 Switch  
fig.05-24.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
S1/S2 Switch Setting  
Latch  
Momentary  
The on/off status will alternate each time you press [S1] [S2].  
The status will be on only while you hold down [S1] [S2].  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Key Range  
Here you can specify the zones of the keyboard in which the upper and lower tones are to be sounded.  
You can also specify how the two tones will be played.  
You can access this screen not only from the Patch Common screen, but also directly by touching <Key Range> in the  
Patch Menu.  
fig.05-30-j.eps_50  
From this screen you can turn the lower  
and upper tones on/off and make other  
changes for the tones.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Key Range Upper/Lower  
Min  
C-1–G9  
C-1–G9  
Specify the lowest keys of the ranges within which the upper tone or lower tone  
will be sounded.  
Specify the highest keys of the ranges within which the upper tone or lower tone  
will be sounded.  
Max  
Single Sw (Single Switch)  
Dual Sw (Dual Switch)  
Split Sw (Split Switch)  
Only the upper tone will play across the entire keyboard.  
The upper tone and lower tone will both play across the entire keyboard.  
The upper tone and lower tone will be split and will sound in separate zones of  
the keyboard.  
If you hold down a note of the keyboard and touch Split Sw, the keyboard will  
be split at that note.  
If you touch Split Sw without holding down a note, the keyboard will be split at  
C4.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Arpeggio  
In addition to accessing this screen from the Patch Common screen, you can access it directly by touching <Arpeggio>  
in the Patch Menu.  
fig.05-40-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Arpeggio Switch  
Patch Tempo  
OFF, ON  
20.0–250.0  
Switches the Arpeggiator on/off.  
Specifies the tempo of an arpeggio. When Clock Source parameter (p.  
198) is set to “INTERNAL,” this setting value is effective.  
Hold  
OFF, ON  
Switches between Hold On/Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance.  
(Arpeggio Hold Switch)  
Destination  
Lower  
Arpeggios will be played only for the lower tone.  
Upper  
Arpeggios will be played only for the upper tone.  
Upper & Lower  
UP  
DOWN  
UP&DOWN  
Arpeggios will be played for both the upper and lower tones.  
Notes you press will be sounded, beginning from low to high.  
Notes you press will be sounded, from high to low.  
Notes you press will be sounded, from low to high, and then back down  
from high to low.  
Motif (Arpeggio Motif)  
Sets the order in which notes of  
the chord will sound.  
RANDOM  
Notes you press will be sounded, in random order.  
NOTE ORDER  
Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them.  
By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody  
lines. Up to 128 notes will be remembered.  
RHYTHM  
ing will not affect the result; the specified pattern will play regardless of the  
pitch of the keys you play.  
PHRASE  
AUTO  
Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the pitch of that key.  
If multiple keys are pressed, the last-pressed key will be valid.  
The timing at which the keys are sounded is assigned automatically, start-  
ing at the lowest key that you pressed.  
Pattern Edit  
Press this when you want to create an original arpeggio pattern.  
For details on creating an arpeggio pattern, refer to “Arpeggio Pattern  
Edit (Creating an Original Arpeggio Pattern)” (p. 71).  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Shuffle Rate  
(Arpeggio Shuffle Rate)  
0–100%  
This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms.  
With a setting of “50%” the notes will be spaced evenly. As the value is  
increased, the note timing will have more of a “dotted” (shuffle) feel.  
fig.Shuffle Rate  
Shuffle Rate = 50%  
Shuffle Rate = 90%  
50  
50  
50  
50  
90 10  
90  
10  
Shuffle Resolution  
16TH, 8TH  
-3– +3  
Specifies the timing resolution in terms of a note value. The note value can  
be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note.  
(Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution)  
Octave Range  
(Arpeggio Octave Range)  
Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place. If you  
want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play, set  
this parameter to “0.” To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play  
and notes 1 octave higher, set this parameter to “+1.” A setting of “-1” will  
make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave low-  
er.  
Keyboard Velocity  
REAL, 1–127  
0–100%  
Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play.  
(Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity)  
If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you  
play the keyboard, set this parameter to “REAL.” If you want each note to  
have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard, set  
this parameter to the desired value (1–127).  
Arpeggio Duration  
Modifies the length of the notes.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
You can create your own arpeggio pattern that specifies how an arpeggio will be sounded. This gives you even more  
interesting ways to use arpeggios.  
An arpeggio pattern is a set of data that can be up to 32 steps (horizontally) x 16 lines (vertically).  
An arpeggio pattern can be saved for an individual patch as part of the patch settings. This means that you can  
create a patch designed specifically for that arpeggio pattern.  
About the Pattern Edit Window  
1. Access the Arpeggio screen (p. 69).  
2. Touch <Edit>.  
fig.05-41-ps.eps  
<Edit>  
The Pattern Edit window will appear.  
Pattern input area  
fig.02-09a.e  
Cursor  
State  
Specifies the status of each line.  
NOTE: Note pitch  
CTRL: Control change  
Note/CC  
(Note/Control Change)  
Specifies the note number or control change number assigned to each line. If Status is  
“NOTE,” this will be a note number (C-1–G9). If Status is “CTRL,” this will be a control  
change number (0–127).  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Pattern Input Area  
This area is where you input or edit notes or control changes. The symbols have the follow-  
ing meaning:  
: Note  
=: Tie  
: Control change  
Value  
Shows the velocity of the note or the value of the control change selected in the pattern input  
area.  
0, 32, 64, 96, 127,  
Tie/Clr  
When inputting notes: When you touch one of these buttons, a note with the velocity shown  
on that button will be input at the cursor location within the pattern input area. When you  
touch <Tie>, a tie will be input at the cursor location.  
When inputting control changes: A control change with the value shown on that button will  
be input at the cursor location within the pattern input area. When you touch <Clr>, the  
selected control change will be erased.  
When you are editing, these buttons modify the velocity of the note that is selected in the  
You can also input the note velocity or control change value by using the VALUE dial or  
[INC/+] [DEC/-].  
Grid  
Specifies the note value that will correspond to “one step” of the arpeggio pattern.  
(Quarter note), (Eighth note),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note)  
(Sixteenth note), (Dotted sixteenth note),  
End Point  
Clear  
Specifies the pattern length as a number of steps (1–32).  
Erases the pattern data (p. 75).  
Real Rec  
(Realtime Recording)  
Uses realtime recording to create a pattern (p. 73).  
Step Rec  
(Step Recording)  
Uses step recording to create a pattern (p. 74).  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Creating a Pattern by Playing in Real Time (Real Rec)  
This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to realtime recording on a sequencer. Your playing on the V-  
Synth GT’s keyboard and your controller operations will be recorded “as is.”  
1. Specify the Grid and End Point of the arpeggio pattern that you will be creating.  
Move the cursor to each value box and set the value.  
2. Touch <Real Rec>.  
The V-Synth GT will be in realtime-input standby mode, and the metronome will sound a guide rhythm.  
fig.02-09c_50  
3. If you want to adjust the tempo, turn ARPEGGIO [TEMPO].  
Turn the knob toward the right to make the tempo faster, or toward the left to make it slower.  
4. In time with the guide rhythm sounded by the metronome, play the V-Synth GT’s keyboard and operate the  
controllers.  
You can repeatedly record over the pattern length (number of steps) you specified in step 1. On each pass, you  
can add new notes and control changes to build up the pattern.  
The notes (specified pitches) and control changes in a single pattern cannot exceed a total of 16. All further  
(seventeenth and later) notes having a new pitch or control changes will not be recorded.  
5. When you are finished with realtime input, touch <Stop>.  
The metronome guide will stop sounding.  
6. Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn on the arpeggiator, and play the keyboard to hear your realtime-recorded  
pattern.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Creating a Pattern by Inputting One Step at a Time (Step Rec)  
This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to step-recording on a sequencer. You can record notes and  
control changes by inputting them one by one.  
1. Specify the End Point of the arpeggio pattern that you want to create.  
Move the cursor to the End Point value box and make the setting.  
2. Touch <Step Rec>.  
The V-Synth GT will be in step-input standby mode.  
fig.02-09d_50  
3. Play the V-Synth GT’s keyboard or operate a controller to input the first step.  
You can repeatedly record over the pattern length (number of steps) you specified in step 1. On each pass, you  
can add new notes and control changes to build up the pattern.  
• To input a tie, hold down the key of the note that you want to tie and press [ ]. You will advance  
as many steps as the number of times you press [ ].  
• Step input records the strength (velocity) with which you press the key, and this will be reflected in  
the level or dynamics of the arpeggiated notes.  
• Control changes will be input with the value that was in effect when you pressed [ ].  
• The notes (specified pitches) and control changes in a single pattern cannot exceed a total  
maximum of 16. A newly pitched note or a control change that would exceed this total will not be  
recorded.  
• Be aware that if you input another note while still holding down the key for the previously input  
note, these notes will be input as a chord located at the same step.  
4. When you are finished with step input, touch <Stop>.  
5. Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn on the arpeggiator, and play the keyboard to hear your step-recorded  
pattern.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Erasing a Pattern (Clear)  
Here’s how to erase data from the pattern. You can erase a specific line or the entire pattern.  
1. To specify a line that you want to erase, move the cursor to that line.  
2. Touch <Clear>.  
A window like the following will appear.  
fig.02-09e_50  
3. To erase a line of data, touch <LINE CLEAR>. To erase the entire pattern, touch <ALL CLEAR>. If you decide you  
don’t want to clear anything, touch <CANCEL>.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Effects (Setting Effects for a Patch)  
The V-Synth GT provides three high-quality effects: Tone-FX (tone effect), Chorus, and Reverb. The tone effect can be  
applied to each tone individually, and the amount of signal sent to chorus and to reverb can be specified individually  
for each tone.  
You can also access the effects screen by touching <Effect> in the Patch Menu, as well as from the Patch Common  
screen.  
Routing  
Each effect block is displayed as if it were a small rack-mounted unit. You can turn each effect on/off to freely specify  
the connection path (signal routing).  
fig.05-50-j.eps_50  
Chorus On/Off Switch  
Chorus Type  
Chorus Master Level  
Reverb Master Level  
Reverb Type  
Reverb On/Off Switch  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
TVA Tone-FX Send  
(TVA Tone-FX Send Level)  
0–127  
These parameters can be set for each tone.  
For details, refer to “Tone-FX (Tone Effect)” (p. 139).  
TVA CHO Send  
0–127  
0–127  
(TVA Chorus Send Level)  
TVA REV Send  
(TVA Reverb Send Level)  
TVA Output Assign  
T-FX  
MAIN  
DIR  
AP Syn Tone-FX Send  
(AP Syn Tone-FX Send Level)  
0–127  
AP Syn CHO Send  
0–127  
0–127  
(AP Syn Chorus Send Level)  
AP Syn REV Send  
(AP Syn Reverb Send Level)  
AP Syn Output Assign  
T-FX  
MAIN  
DIR  
Tone-FX  
(Tone-FX On/Off Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Tone-FX Type  
Tone-FX Master Level  
00 (Thru)–41  
0–127  
Tone-FX To CHO  
(Tone-FX Chorus Send Level)  
0–127  
Tone FX-To REV  
(Tone-FX Reverb Send Level)  
0–127  
CHO  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–08  
Switches chorus on and off.  
(Chorus On/Off Switch)  
CHO Type  
(Chorus Type)  
choose one of eight types of chorus. For details on each type of chorus, refer  
to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included  
CD-ROM.  
CHO Master Level  
(Chorus Master Level)  
0–127  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus.  
CHO To REV  
(Chorus Reverb Send Level)  
0–127  
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through chorus. If you  
don’t want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”  
REV  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–13  
Switches reverb on and off.  
(Reverb On/Off Switch)  
REV Type (Reverb Type)  
Touching this will take you to the Reverb screen (p. 79), where you can  
choose one of 13 types of reverb. For details on each type of reverb, refer  
to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included  
CD-ROM.  
REV Master Level  
(Reverb Master Level)  
0–127  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Tone-FX  
This is an effect that can be applied to each tone individually.  
For details, refer to “Tone-FX (Tone Effect)” (p. 139).  
Chorus  
fig.05-51-j.eps  
Chorus Switch  
Chorus Type  
Search Button  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Chorus Switch  
CHO Type (Chorus Type)  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–08  
Switches the Chorus on/off.  
You can choose one of eight types of chorus.  
In this editing screen you can select the chorus type and edit the parameters  
for that type. For details on each type of chorus, refer to  
“COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included CD-  
ROM.  
When you touch <Search>, the Chorus Type List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the chorus from the list.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Patch)  
Reverb  
fig.05-52-j.eps  
Reverb Switch  
Reverb Type  
Search Button  
Parameter  
Reverb Switch  
REV Type (Reverb Type)  
Value  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–13  
Description  
Switches the Reverb on/off.  
You can choose one of 13 types of reverb.  
In this editing screen you can select the reverb type and edit the parameters  
for that type. For details on each type of reverb, refer to  
“COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included CD-  
ROM.  
When you touch <Search>, the Reverb Type List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the reverb from the list.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Tone)  
A patch consists of a combination of two tones. This chapter will explain how to edit these tones, and what the tone  
parameters do.  
Creating a Tone  
Using a template to create a patch intuitively (Sound Shaper II)  
By using the Sound Shaper II function, you can select a group and template that is close to the sound you want,  
and then simply turn the knobs to edit the important aspects of the sound, just like a professional sound designer  
(p. 158).  
Creating a patch from scratch (Pro Edit)  
Based on the tones the V-Synth GT provides, you can combine eight elements (sections) and edit the parameters  
of each section to create new sounds (p. 85).  
Four Tips for Editing Tones  
Select a tone that is similar to the sound you wish to create.  
It’s hard to create a new sound that’s exactly what you want if you just select a tone and modify its parameters  
at random. It makes sense to start with a tone whose sound is related to what you have in mind.  
Check the Structure setting.  
The structure type is an important parameter which determines how the eight sections are combined. Before  
you actually begin editing, you should understand how the sections are related to each other (p. 28).  
Decide which section(s) you will use.  
When creating a tone, it is very important to decide which section(s) you will use. In the Edit screen of each  
section, use the on/off switch to specify whether that section will be used (on) or not used (off). You can also  
use the on/off buttons located in the STRUCTURE section of the V-Synth GT’s panel.  
Turn Effects off.  
itself so you can better evaluate the changes you’re making. Since you will hear the original sound of the tone  
1. Access the Patch Play screen, and select the tone whose settings you wish to modify (p. 55).  
If you want to create all your tones from the ground up, rather than the tones that have already been prepared, carry  
out the Initialize operation (p. 84).  
2. Use Sound Shaper II (p. 158) or ProEdit (p. 85) to edit the tone.  
3. Apply a tone effect (p. 139).  
4. Save the tone (p. 81).  
When you save the tone, any data previously stored at the save destination will be overwritten and lost.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Tone)  
Tone Menu  
Tone Write (Saving Tones)  
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound.  
If you want to keep the modified sound, you must save it in the internal (internal memory).  
When you modify the settings of a tone, the Patch Play screen will indicate “*.” Once you save the patch into internal  
memory, the “*” indication goes away.  
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost. However,  
the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Factory Reset (p. 235).  
1. Make sure that the tone you wish to save is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.06a-01.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Tone Write>.  
The Tone Write window appears.  
fig.06a-02.eps_50  
4. Turn the VALUE dial to specify the save-destination tone.  
• When you touch <Search>, the Tone Write Number List window will appear, allowing you to select the save-  
destination tone from the list.  
5. Touch <OK> to execute the Save operation.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Patch Mode (Editing a Tone)  
Tone Name (Naming a Tone)  
Before you save the tone, here’s how to give it a new name. You can assign a name of up to twelve characters to a tone.  
1. Make sure that the tone that you want to name is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.06a-01.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Tone Name>.  
The Tone Name window appears.  
fig.06a-04.eps_50  
4. Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
< << >< >> >  
<shift>  
<clear all>  
<back space>  
<delete>  
Erases all characters in the text box.  
Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
5. When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the tone name.  
If you want to return to the original unedited name, touch <EXIT>.  
* You will lose your edited tone settings if you switch to another tone or turn off the power. If you want to keep a tone whose settings  
you have edited, then perform the Save operation (p. 81).  
* You can also assign a category to the tone (p. 83).  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Patch Mode (Editing a Tone)  
Tone Category (Assigning the Category of a Tone)  
If you assign a category to your tones, you’ll be able to search for them by category in the Tone List window.  
If no category is assigned to a tone, its category name will be “No Assign.”  
1. Make sure that the tone that you want to category is selected.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Tone Category>.  
The Tone Category window appears.  
fig.06a-05.eps_50  
4. Select a category from the list.  
Tone Category List  
Category  
Contents  
No Assign  
No Assign  
Synth  
Synth  
Lead  
Lead  
Pad, Strings  
Vox, Choir  
Pad/Strings  
Voice/Choir  
Piano, Keyboards  
Bass, Guitar  
Winds  
Piano/Keyboards  
Bass/Guitar  
Winds  
Bell, Mallet, Hit  
Melodic Sequence  
Rhythmic Sequence  
Arpeggio  
Bell/Mallet/Hit  
Melodic (i.e., pitched) sequences  
Arpeggio  
FX, Noise, Ambient  
Ethnic  
Effect/Noise/Ambient  
Ethnic  
Drum, Perc  
Combination, Others  
Drum/Percussion  
Combinations using zones (p. 88)/other  
5. Touch <OK> to finalize the category.  
* You will lose your edited tone settings if you switch to another tone or turn off the power. If you want to keep a tone whose settings  
you have edited, then perform the Save operation (p. 81).  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Patch Mode (Editing a Tone)  
Tone Init (Initializing the Tone Settings)  
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected tone to a standard set of values.  
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected tone; the tones that are stored in internal memory and  
temporary area will not be affected. If you wish to restore all of the V-Synth GT’s settings to their factory values,  
perform a Factory Reset (p. 235).  
1. Select the tone that you wish to initialize.  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.06a-01.eps_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Tone Init>.  
A window like the following appears.  
fig.06a-07.eps_50  
4. Touch <OK>.  
The initialization will be carried out.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
“Pro Edit” lets you individually edit all of a tone’s parameters, allowing you to perform detailed and professional tone  
editing.  
1. In the Patch Play screen, select the tone that you want to edit.  
fig.06b-01-j.eps_50  
<PRO EDIT>  
2. Touch <PRO EDIT>.  
The Pro Edit window will appear.  
fig.06b-02-ps.eps_50  
After you’ve selected a structure, edit the parameters of each section to create the sound.  
3. Save the tone you’ve created. (p. 81)  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Com (Settings Common to the Entire Tone)  
Structure  
Select the type of structure.  
The icons that indicate each section show the parameter that is selected for each. You can turn each section on/off  
by pressing the V-Synth GT’s buttons or by touching these icons.  
By holding down [SHIFT] and touching an icon, you can jump directly to the editing screen for that parameter.  
fig.06b-10.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Structure Type  
1
This is the most conventional structure. Different sounds from OSC1 and  
OSC2 are mixed by MOD, processed by COSM1 to create the tonal char-  
acter (e.g., using SBF (Side Band Filter)), and then processed by COSM2 to  
adjust the tone (e.g., using TVF).  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis function can be mixed into  
the final result.  
2
3
This structure connects OSC1 and OSC2 asymmetrically. This is effective  
when using a modulation that has the modulator set to anything other than  
“MIX.” Typically, you will use OSC1 and COSM1 to create the basic sound,  
then select the OSC2 sound and MOD settings to add variation, and finally  
select TVF in COSM2 to adjust the tone.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis function can be mixed into  
the final result.  
In this structure, OSC1 is paired with COSM1, and OSC2 is paired with  
COSM2. You can use a controller such as the Time Trip Pad to morph be-  
OSC2 and COSM2.  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis function can be mixed into  
the final result.  
4
5
Unlike types 1–3, this lets you apply effects such as MOD to AP-Synthesis  
sounds as well.  
If you want to apply an effect such as MOD to the sound of AP-Synthesis,  
turn the OSC2 switch ON.  
If you select this structure, you’ll be able to perform using Vocal Designer. For  
details on using Vocal Designer, refer to “Vocal Designer” (p. 146).  
The sound of the V-Synth GT’s new AP-Synthesis function can be mixed into  
the final result.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Keyboard  
fig.06b-11.eps_50  
Parameter  
Keyboard  
Mono/Poly  
Value  
Description  
Only the last-played note will sound.  
The monophonic setting is effective when playing a solo instrument patch  
such as sax or flute.  
Mono  
(Monophonic)  
Poly  
(Polyphonic)  
Two or more notes can be played simultaneously.  
Legato (Legato Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Legato is valid when the Mono/Poly parameter is set to monophonic. This  
setting specifies whether the Legato function will be used (ON) or not (OFF).  
With the Legato Switch parameter “ON,” pressing a key while continuing  
to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to the pitch of the  
most recently pressed key, sounding all the while. This creates a smooth  
transition between notes, which is effective when you wish to simulate the  
hammering-on and pulling-off techniques used by a guitarist.  
Portamento  
Portamento  
(Portamento Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied (ON) or not (OFF).  
Mode  
(Portamento Mode)  
NORMAL  
LEGATO  
Portamento will always be applied.  
Portamento will be applied only when you play legato (i.e., when you press  
the next key before releasing the previous key).  
Type (Portamento Type)  
Time (Portamento Time)  
RATE  
TIME  
The time it takes will be constant, regardless of how far apart in pitch the  
notes are.  
When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the pitch will  
change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take  
more time.  
0–127  
Time Velo Sens  
(Portamento Time Velocity Sensi-  
tivity)  
-63– +63  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the portamento Time. If you want  
portamento Time to be speeded up for strongly played notes, set this param-  
eter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a  
negative (-) value.  
Zone  
Refer to “Zone Settings (Zone)” (p. 88)  
Mono/Poly, Legato, and Portamento have no effect on AP-Synthesis.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Zone Settings (Zone)  
On the V-Synth GT, the keyboard range is divided into up to 16 areas for each tone, allowing a different sound to be  
played in each area. Each of these areas in the keyboard range is called a “zone.”  
The following tone settings are applied in common to each of the individual sounds that are divided by zone.  
Common group settings (except for Structure Type)  
You can select a different structure for each zone, but if you select structure 5, all zones will be set to structure 5.  
AP-Synthesis does not support Zones.  
Splitting the Keyboard to Play Different Sounds (Split)  
A patch that contains settings to play different patches in each keyboard zone is called a split tone. Here’s how to  
create a split tone.  
1. In the Zone area of the Keyboard screen (p. 87), touch <Edit>.  
The Tone Zone window appears.  
fig.03-32_50  
2. In the lower part of the screen, touch <Split>.  
A window like the following appears.  
fig.11e  
Range of notes that will sound for the specified zone  
Zone number  
3. Touch <01>.  
Zone 01 will be selected, and the top note number of zone 01 will be displayed in the upper right of the screen.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
4. Specify the split point between zones 01 and 02. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/+] [DEC/-] to specify the  
note number.  
If you want to divide the keyboard into three zones, lower the top note of zone 02, and specify the split point  
between zones 02 and 03. By lowering the top note of the highest zone in this way, you can add more zones. You  
can specify a maximum of sixteen zones.  
5. Touch <OK>.  
6. In this state, zone 01 is selected. Specify the sound that you want to play in zone 01.  
7. After you have specified the sound that you want to play in zone 01, next specify the sound for zone 02.  
8. Specify the sound that you want to play in zone 02.  
In this way you can create a patch that plays different sounds on either side of the split point you specified in step  
4.  
Each zone works just like a single tone. You can create the sound for a zone from scratch in the same way as for a  
tone, as described in the procedure “Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)” (p. 85).  
9. To save the patch you created, perform the Write operation (p. 81).  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Bender/Octave  
fig.06b-12.eps_50  
Parameter  
Bender  
Value  
Description  
Pitch Bend Range Down  
0–48  
0–48  
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever  
is all the way left. For example if this is set to “48” and you move the pitch  
bend lever all the way to the left, the pitch will fall 4 octaves.  
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever  
is all the way right. For example, if this parameter is set to “12,” the pitch  
will rise one octave when the pitch bend lever is moved to the right-most po-  
sition.  
Pitch Bend Range Up  
Octave Shift  
Octave Shift  
-3– +3  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in units of an octave (+/-3  
octaves).  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Matrix Control  
fig.06b-13-e.eps  
Up to eight Matrix Controls can be  
used in a single patch. In the right  
side of the screen, touch the “Control  
1/2”–“Control 7/8” tabs to select  
the matrix control that you want to  
use.  
Search button  
Matrix Control Matrix Control  
Matrix Control  
Destination  
Source  
Sens  
Matrix Control  
Ordinarily, if you wanted to change tone parameters using an external MIDI device, you would need to send System  
Exclusive messages—MIDI messages designed exclusively for the V-Synth GT. However, System Exclusive messages  
tend to be complicated, and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large.  
For that reason, a number of the more typical of the V-Synth GT’s tone parameters have been designed so they  
accept the use of Control Change (or other) MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values. This  
provides you with a variety of means of changing the way tones are played. For example, you can use the Pitch  
Bend lever to change the LFO cycle rate, or use the keyboard’s touch to open and close a filter.  
The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the tone parameters is called  
the Matrix Control.  
To use the Matrix Control, specify which MIDI message (Source parameter) will be used to control which parameter  
(Destination parameter), and how greatly (Sens parameter).  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Source 1, 2  
Value  
OFF  
CC01–31, 33–95  
BEND  
Description  
Matrix control will not be used.  
Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
Pitch Bend  
(Matrix Control Source 1, 2)  
Sets the MIDI message used to  
change the patch parameter with  
the Matrix Control.  
AFT  
Aftertouch  
+PAD-X  
+PAD-Y  
PAD-X  
PAD-Y  
TRIP-R  
BEAM-L  
BEAM-R  
KNOB1  
KNOB2  
VELO  
Time Trip pad (horizontal direction from the center)  
Time Trip pad (vertical direction from the center)  
Time Trip pad (horizontal direction)  
Time Trip pad (vertical direction)  
Time Trip pad (center from the circumference)  
D Beam controller (left)  
D Beam controller (right)  
Assignable Controller ([C1])  
Assignable Controller ([C2])  
Note Number  
KEYF  
Sens 1, 2  
(Matrix Control Sens 1, 2)  
-63– +63  
this effect.  
Destination 1, 2  
OSC1/2-PITCH  
Oscillator Pitch (p. 97, p. 99, p. 102)  
Time/Pulse Width (p. 97, p. 103)  
Level (p. 113)  
(Matrix Control Destination 1, 2)  
OSC1/2-TIME/PW  
OSC1/2-FORMA/FAT  
OSC1/2-LVL  
Specifies the parameters that will  
be controlled by the matrix con-  
trollers. When not controlling pa-  
rameters with the Matrix Control,  
set this to “OFF.” Up to two pa-  
rameters can be specified for  
each Matrix Control, and con-  
trolled simultaneously.  
OSC1/2-PENV-ATK  
OSC1/2-PENV-DCY  
OSC1/2-PENV-REL  
OSC1/2-TENV-ATK  
OSC1/2-TENV-DCY  
OSC1/2-TENV-REL  
OSC1/2-FENV-ATK  
OSC1/2-FENV-DCY  
OSC1/2-FENV-REL  
OSC1/2-AENV-ATK  
OSC1/2-AENV-DCY  
OSC1/2-AENV-REL  
OSC1/2-LFO-RATE  
OSC1/2-LFO-PCH  
OSC1/2-LFO-TM/PW  
OSC1/2-LFO-FR/FT  
OSC1/2-LFO-LVL  
Pitch Envelope Attack Time (p. 121)  
Pitch Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
Pitch Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
Time Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
Time Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
Formant Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
Formant Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
Oscillator TVA Envelope Attack Time (p. 121)  
Oscillator TVA Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
Oscillator TVA Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
Oscillator LFO Rate (p. 122)  
For details on each parameter, re-  
fer to the corresponding reference  
page.  
Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth (p. 102)  
Time/Pulse Width LFO Depth (p. 103)  
Formant/Fat LFO Depth (p. 104, p. 112)  
Oscillator Level LFO Depth (p. 113)  
CSM1/2-PRM1  
Refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on  
the included CD-ROM.  
CSM1/2-PRM2  
Refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on  
the included CD-ROM.  
CSM1/2-ENV1-ATK  
CSM1/2-ENV1-DCY  
CSM1/2-ENV1-REL  
COSM Envelope Attack Time (p. 121)  
COSM Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
COSM Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
CSM1/2-ENV2-ATK  
CSM1/2-ENV2-DCY  
CSM1/2-ENV2-REL  
CSM1/2-LFO-RATE  
CSM1/2-LFO-PRM1  
COSM Envelope Attack Time (p. 121)  
COSM Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
COSM Envelope Release Time (p. 121)  
COSM LFO Rate (p. 122)  
the included CD-ROM.  
CSM1/2-LFO-PRM2  
the included CD-ROM.  
TVA-LVL  
Level (p. 119)  
TVA-ENV-ATK  
TVA-ENV-DCY  
TVA-ENV-REL  
TVA-LFO-RATE  
TVA-LFO-LVL  
TVA-LFO-PAN  
TONE-FX-SEND  
CHO-SEND  
REV-SEND  
TVA Envelope Attack Time (p. 121)  
TVA Envelope Decay Time (p. 121)  
TVA LFO Rate (p. 122)  
Level LFO Depth (p. 119)  
Pan LFO Depth (p. 119)  
Tone-FX Send Level (p. 139)  
Chorus Send Level (p. 139)  
Reverb Send Level (p. 139)  
T-FX-PRM 1–3  
Refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on  
the included CD-ROM.  
TVA-PAN  
Pan (p. 119)  
When you touch <Search>, the Matrix Control Dest List window will appear, allowing you to select the Matrix  
Control Destination from the list.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Tune  
fig.06b-14.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Tone Coarse Tune  
-48– +48  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 oc-  
taves).  
Tone Fine Tune  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50 cents).  
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.  
Scale Tune  
(Tone Scale Tune Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal tempera-  
ment.  
The V-Synth allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments other than  
equal temperament. The pitch is specified in one-cent units relative to the  
equal tempered pitch.  
One-cent is 1/100th of a semitone.  
The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an external  
MIDI device.  
Scale Tune C–B  
(Tone Scale Tune C–B)  
-100– +100  
Makes scale tune settings.  
<Example>  
Equal Temperament  
Note name  
Equal  
Just Tempera-  
ment (tonic C)  
0
Arabian  
Scale  
-6  
+45  
-2  
-12  
-51  
-8  
+43  
-4  
+47  
0
-10  
-49  
This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and  
is the most widely used method of temperament used in  
Western music. The V-Synth employs equal  
temperament when the Scale Tune Switch is set to  
“OFF.”  
temperament  
C
C#  
D
Eb  
E
F
F#  
G
G#  
A
Bb  
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-8  
+4  
+16  
-14  
-2  
-10  
+2  
+14  
-16  
+14  
-12  
Just Temperament (Tonic of C)  
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads  
sound pure in this tuning. However, this effect is  
achieved only in one key, and the triads will become  
ambiguous if you transpose.  
Arabian Scale  
In this scale, E and B are a quarter note lower and C#,  
F# and G# are a quarter-note higher compared to equal  
temperament. The intervals between G and B, C and E,  
F and G#, Bb and C#, and Eb and F# have a natural  
third—the interval between a major third and a minor  
third. On the V-Synth, you can use Arabian  
temperament in the three keys of G, C and F.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
OSC1/OSC2 (Oscillator 1/2)  
The “oscillator” is the section that specifies the basic wave that the V-Synth GT will play, and modifies this wave in  
various ways. Each tone can contain up to two oscillators.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Oscillator Switch  
OFF, ON  
Switches the oscillator on/off.  
OSC Type  
fig.06b-20-j.eps  
Oscillator Switch  
Oscillator Type  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Oscillator Type  
Analog OSC  
PCM OSC  
External In  
Analog Oscillator  
PCM Oscillator  
External Input Oscillator  
A signal applied to the rear panel’s INPUT jacks can be used as an oscillator.  
This means that you can use the keyboard to play the signal that’s being input  
from an external source. (You’ll hear the sound only while you are playing  
the keyboard.)  
You can’t use an audio signal that’s received via digital input (DIGITAL IN)  
(p. 200).  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
OSC Type (Analog OSC)  
fig.06b-21-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Waveform  
SAW:  
This contains numerous harmonics. It can be used as the basis for most  
instrumental sounds. It is particularly suitable for brass instruments and  
string instruments (such as violin or piano).  
This contains a rich array of odd-numbered harmonics. It is suitable as  
the basic sound material for woodwinds and percussion instruments  
(such as clarinet or xylophone).  
(Analog Oscillator Waveform)  
Sawtooth wave  
Selects the wave upon which the  
sound is to be based when using  
an analog oscillator.  
SQUARE:  
Square wave  
TRIANGLE:  
Triangle wave  
This contains relatively fewer harmonics. It is suitable as the material  
for woodwind sounds (such as recorder or flute).  
SINE: Sine wave  
This is the simplest waveform. It contains no harmonics at all, and  
sounds like whistling.  
RAMP:  
Ramp wave  
This is a trapezoidal waveform that is similar to a pulse wave.  
JUNO:  
Modulated sawtooth  
wave  
This is a modified sawtooth wave found on Roland’s αJUNO synthe-  
sizer. It has a brighter sound than the conventional “SAW” waveform.  
HQ-SAW:  
High quality saw-  
tooth wave  
This is a high-quality sawtooth waveform that is free of the aliasing  
noise that can be a problem on digital synthesizers. If you select HQ-  
SAW, the Sub OSC, Pulse Width, and Fat parameters will be unavail-  
able.  
HQ-SQUARE:  
High quality square  
wave  
This is a high-quality square waveform that is free of the aliasing noise  
that can be a problem on digital synthesizers. If you select HQ-  
SQUARE, the Sub OSC and Fat parameters will be unavailable.  
NOISE:  
Noise wave  
This is white noise. You can use it to create the noise component of a  
sound.  
LA-SAW:  
LA sawtooth wave  
This simulates a waveform used in the LA (Linear Arithmetic) sound  
generator of the Roland D-50. It has a milder sound than the conven-  
tional “SAW” waveform.  
LA-SQUARE:  
LA square wave  
This simulates a waveform used in the LA (Linear Arithmetic) sound  
generator of the Roland D-50. It has a milder sound than the conven-  
tional “SQUARE” waveform.  
SUPER-SAW:  
Super Saw  
This is an intensified simulation of a feature found on the Roland JP-  
8000/JP-8080. It is the sound of seven sawtooth waves played simul-  
taneously. A pitch-shifted sound is added to the center. This is suitable  
for creating rich sounds such as string-type sounds.  
FBACK-OSC:  
Feedback Oscillator  
This is an intensified simulation of a feature found on the Roland JP-  
8000/JP-8080. It is a sound that simulates guitar feedback. It is suit-  
able for creating sharply aggressive sounds.  
X-MOD-OSC:  
Cross Modulation  
Oscillator  
This is an intensified simulation of a feature found on the Roland JP-  
8000/JP-8080. It uses the OSC2 waveform to modulate the frequency  
of OSC1.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Sub OSC Octave Select  
(Sub Oscillator Octave Select)  
Value  
OFF  
-2  
-1  
0
Description  
The sub-oscillator will not be used.  
The sub-oscillator will be added two octaves below the basic pitch.  
The sub-oscillator will be added one octave below the basic pitch.  
The sub-oscillator will be added at the same pitch as the basic pitch.  
Specifies the volume of the sub oscillator.  
Sub Level (Sub Oscillator Level)  
Impact (Analog Oscillator Impact)  
0–127  
0.0–4.0  
Specifies the sharpness of the attack of the analog oscillator. Higher  
settings will produce a sharper attack.  
Wave Gain  
Pitch (Oscillator Pitch)  
-12– +12 dB  
-63– +63  
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform.  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator.  
Coarse Tune  
(Oscillator Coarse Tune)  
-48– +48  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in semitone steps (+/-4  
octaves).  
Fine Tune  
(Oscillator Fine Tune)  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50  
cents).  
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.  
Depending on the waveform you’re using, the assignment of knobs 5 and 6 will change as follows.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
If Sub OSC is 0, -1, or -2  
Pulse Width  
Detune  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
Specifies the amount by which the wave shape will be modified.  
Specifies the detuning (pitch difference) of the sub-oscillator.  
If the Waveform is SUPER-SAW  
SS Detune  
Mix  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
Adjusts the detune (pitch difference) for the super-saw.  
Adjusts the volume of the detuned sounds relative to the central sound.  
As the knob is rotated to the right, the detuned sounds will become  
louder, making the sound thicker.  
If the Waveform is FBACK-OSC  
Harmonics  
FBK Amount (Feedback Amount)  
If the Waveform is X-MOD-OSC  
X-MOD (Cross Modulation Depth)  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
Varies the sound of the harmonics.  
Adjusts the amount of feedback to adjust the level of the harmonics.  
-63– +63  
Cross Modulation is when OSC2 modifies the frequency of OSC1. X-  
MOD adjusts the depth of this Cross Modulation. As the knob is rotat-  
ed toward the right, the sound of OSC1 will become more complex,  
with more overtones, and will be suitable for creating metallic sounds  
and sound effects.  
“Cross Modulation Depth” can be selected only for OSC1.  
“Cross Modulation Depth” does nothing if OSC2 is off.  
Emphasizes the low-frequency region of the sound.  
Fat  
0–127  
In other cases  
Pulse Width  
Fat  
-63– +63  
0–127  
Specifies the amount by which the wave shape will be modified.  
Emphasizes the low-frequency region of the sound.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
What is a sub-oscillator?  
The sub-oscillator adds a low pitch to create a thicker sound. You can use the Detune parameter to add a detune effect.  
Detune is the effect or technique of adding (layering) a sound at a slightly different pitch. When using the sub-  
oscillator, you can apply a detune effect by setting Detune to a value other than “0.”  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
OSC Type (PCM OSC)  
fig.06b-22-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Waveform  
(PCM Oscillator Waveform)  
1–999  
(wave number)  
Selects the wave upon which the sound is to be based when using a PCM  
oscillator.  
When you touch <Search>, the Wave List window will appear, allowing  
you to select the wave from the list.  
When you select a wave, the wave name, encoding type, and stereo/  
mono will also be displayed.  
Start Offset  
(PCM Oscillator Start Offset)  
0–**  
Specifies the starting address of the wave.  
Playback Mode  
(PCM Oscillator Playback Mode)  
RETRIGGER  
LEGATO  
The sample will play back from the beginning each time you play a key.  
When you play legato, the playback point will be synchronized with the cur-  
rently playing sound.  
STEP  
Each time you play a key, the sample will play back to the next event (p. 189)  
and then stop.  
EVENT  
The sample will be divided at each event and assigned to separate keys.  
Each time you press a key, the sample will play from the beginning of the  
corresponding event.  
Vari Sw  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Switches whether the sound will be produced using VariPhrase (ON) or lin-  
early (OFF).  
(PCM Oscillator Vari Switch)  
Time Trip Sw  
(Time Trip Switch)  
Beat Keep Sw  
(Time Trip Beat Keep Switch)  
After Time Trip is operated, this selects whether you will “chase” to the beat  
location where you otherwise would have been if Time Trip had not been op-  
erated (ON), or whether this “chase” will not occur (OFF).  
Loop Sw  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the wave will be played as a loop (ON) or not (OFF).  
(PCM Oscillator Loop Switch)  
Robot Sw  
(PCM Oscillator Robot Voice  
Switch)  
Specifies whether the pitch of the wave will be held steady (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
This is available only if the encode type (p. 188) is “SOLO.”  
Tempo Sync Sw  
(PCM Oscillator Tempo Sync  
Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the wave will be sounded in sync with the tempo clock  
(ON) or not (OFF).  
Wave Gain  
Pitch (Oscillator Pitch)  
-12– +12 dB  
-63– +63  
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform.  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Coarse Tune  
(Oscillator Coarse Tune)  
-48– +48  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 octaves).  
Fine Tune (Oscillator Fine Tune)  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50 cents).  
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.  
This sets the playback speed (time).  
This sets the vocal quality (formant).  
Time  
Formant  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
OSC Type (External In)  
You can use the signal being received from the rear panel INPUT jack as the oscillator. This allows you to play an  
external input source from the keyboard.  
fig.06b-23-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Wave Gain  
Value  
-12– +12 dB  
Description  
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Pitch (common to Analog and PCM)  
fig.06b-24-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pitch (Oscillator Pitch)  
Pitch Keyfollow  
(Oscillator Pitch Keyfollow)  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator.  
This specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you play a key  
one octave higher (i.e., 12 keys upward on the keyboard).  
If you want the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional keyboard, set  
this to “+100.” If you want the pitch to rise two octaves, set this to “+200.”  
Conversely, set this to a negative value if you want the pitch to fall. With a  
setting of “0,” all keys will produce the same pitch.  
Pitch  
+200  
+100  
+50  
0
-50  
-200  
C6  
-100  
C7  
Key  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
Coarse Tune  
-48– +48  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 octaves).  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50 cents).  
(Oscillator Coarse Tune)  
Fine Tune (Oscillator Fine Tune)  
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.  
Random  
(Oscillator Random Pitch Depth)  
0, 1, 2, 3, 4,  
5, 6, 7, 8, 9,  
10, 20, 30,  
100, 200,  
This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a  
key is pressed. If you do not want the pitch to change randomly, set this to  
“0.” These values are in units of cents (1/100th of a semitone).  
300, 400,  
500, 600,  
700, 800,  
900, 1000,  
1100, 1200  
Pitch LFO Depth  
(Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth)  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the pitch. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Pulse Width (Analog)  
fig.06b-25-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Pulse Width  
Pulse Width Keyfollow  
Value  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Description  
Specifies the amount by which the wave shape will be modified.  
Specifies the amount by which the pulse width value will be affected by the  
key you play.  
Pulse Width LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pulse width.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the pulse width. For details on envelope settings,  
refer to “Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Fat (Analog)  
fig.06b-26-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Fat  
Value  
0–127  
Description  
Emphasizes the low-frequency region of the sound.  
Fat Keyfollow  
-200– +200  
Specifies the amount by which the fat value will be affected by the key you  
play.  
Fat LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect fat.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the fat. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
If you use the sub-oscillator (p. 98), the Fat will change to the Detune.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Detune (Analog, when using Sub OSC)  
fig.06b-28-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Detune  
Value  
-63– +63  
Description  
Specifies the detuning (pitch difference) of the sub-oscillator. This setting is  
valid if the Sub-Oscillator Octave Select is set to “-2, -1, or 0.”  
Detune Keyfollow  
Detune LFO Depth  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Specifies the amount by which the detune value will be affected by the key  
you play.  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect detune.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the detune. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
SS Detune (Analog, when SUPER-SAW is selected)  
fig.06b-29-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
SS Detune  
Value  
-63– +63  
Description  
Adjusts the degree of pitch detuning. As the knob is rotated to the right, the  
pitch will be detuned more greatly, making the sound more spacious.  
SS Detune Keyfollow  
SS Detune LFO Depth  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Specifies the amount by which the detune value will be affected by the key  
you play.  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect detune.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the detune. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Mix (Analog, when SUPER-SAW is selected)  
fig.06b-29-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Mix  
Value  
-63– +63  
Description  
Adjusts the volume of the detuned sounds relative to the central sound. As the  
knob is rotated to the right, the detuned sounds will become louder, making  
the sound thicker.  
Mix Keyfollow  
Mix LFO Depth  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Specifies the amount by which the Mix value will be affected by the key you  
play.  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect Mix.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the Mix. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Harmonics (Analog, when FBACK-OSC is selected)  
fig.06b-30-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Harmonics  
Harmonics Keyfollow  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Varies the sound of the harmonics.  
Specifies the amount by which the Harmonics value will be affected by the  
key you play.  
Harmonics LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect Harmonics.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the Harmonics. For details on envelope settings,  
refer to “Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
You can create distinctive effects by applying an LFO or envelope to Harmonics or FBK Amount.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
FBK Amount (Analog, when FBACK-OSC is selected)  
fig.06b-31-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
FBK Amount (Feedback Amount)  
Amount Keyfollow  
Value  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Description  
Adjusts the amount of feedback to adjust the level of the harmonics.  
Specifies the amount by which the feedback value will be affected by the key  
you play.  
Amount LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect feedback.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the feedback. For details on envelope settings, refer  
to “Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
You can create distinctive effects by applying an LFO or envelope to Harmonics or FBK Amount.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
X-Mod (Analog, when X-MOD-OSC is selected)  
fig.06b-32-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
X-Mod (Cross Modulation Depth)  
-63– +63  
Cross Modulation is when OSC2 modifies the frequency of OSC1. X-Mod  
adjusts the depth of this Cross Modulation. As the knob is rotated toward the  
right, the sound of OSC1 will become more complex, with more overtones,  
and will be suitable for creating metallic sounds and sound effects.  
“Cross Modulation Depth” can be selected only for OSC1.  
“Cross Modulation Depth” does nothing if OSC2 is off.  
X-Mod Keyfollow  
X-Mod LFO Depth  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Specifies the amount by which the Cross Modulation value will be affected  
by the key you play.  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect Cross Modulation.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the Cross Modulation. For details on envelope  
settings, refer to “Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Time (PCM)  
fig.06b-33-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Time  
Time Keyfollow  
Value  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Description  
This sets the range of change in playback speed (time).  
Specifies the amount by which the time value will be affected by the key you  
play.  
Time Offset  
BWD  
ZERO  
FWD  
Specifies “reverse playback” as the basic speed when the time value is “0.”  
Specifies “stop” as the basic speed when the time value is “0.”  
Specifies “normal playback” as the basic speed when the time value is “0.”  
Time LFO Depth  
Time Offset <How the Time parameter is related to playback speed>  
Time  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
FWD  
ZERO  
BWD  
Reverse playback  
-2x speed  
4x speed  
Stop  
Reverse playback  
-2x speed  
Normal speed  
Stop  
Reverse playback  
2x speed  
Normal speed  
Stop  
4x speed  
2x speed  
Normal speed  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the time. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Formant (PCM)  
fig.06b-34-ps.eps_50  
You can use this only if the Vari switch (p. 99) is on and when the Encode Type (p. 188) is “SOLO.”  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Formant  
Formant Keyfollow  
-200– +200  
Specifies the amount by which the formant value will be affected by the key  
you play.  
Energy  
OFF, 1–127  
-63– +63  
Specifies how much the fundamental pitch will be emphasized in order to  
make the sound more well-defined. Set this to “OFF” if you do not want to  
use the Energy parameter.  
Fmt LFO Depth  
(Formant LFO Depth)  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect formant.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the formant. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
“Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
OSC TVA (common to Analog and PCM)  
fig.06b-35-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Level  
0–127  
Specifies the volume of the oscillator.  
Level Keyfollow  
-200– +200  
ing to the key that is pressed. Relative to the volume at the C4 key (center C),  
positive (+) settings will cause the volume to rise for notes higher than C4,  
and negative (-) settings will cause the volume to fall for notes higher than  
C4. Larger settings will produce greater change.  
Level LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the oscillator.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the sub TVA. For details on envelope settings, refer  
to “Making Envelope Settings” (p. 121).  
If you don’t notice any change when you adjust the OSC TVA values, check the TVA settings (p. 119).  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
LFO (common to Analog and PCM)  
fig.06b-36-ps.eps_50  
In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the oscillator. For details on LFO settings, refer to  
“Making LFO Settings” (p. 122).  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
MOD  
In the MOD section, you can not only simply mix OSC1 and OSC2, but also combine them in a variety of ways to  
create sounds. This is especially effective when you’ve selected analog oscillators.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Modulator Switch  
OFF, ON  
Switches the modulator on/off.  
fig.06b-40-j.eps_50  
Modulator Switch  
MOD Type  
Parameter  
Modulator Type  
Value  
MIX  
Description  
Adds OSC1 and OSC2.  
RING  
This is a ring modulator. It  
OSC1  
OSC2  
Output  
generates a complex wave-  
form by multiplying OSC1  
and OSC2. For example, if  
OSC1 and OSC2 are both  
simple analog waveforms,  
you can create metallic bell-  
like sounds.  
FM  
This is a frequency modula-  
tor. It generates a complex  
waveform by using OSC2 to  
apply FM (Frequency Modu-  
lation) to OSC1.  
OSC1  
OSC2  
Output  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Value  
ENV RING  
Description  
This is an envelope ring. It  
uses the volume changes  
(envelope) of OSC2 to con-  
trol the volume of OSC1.  
OSC1  
OSC2  
Envelope  
Output  
OSC SYNC  
This is oscillator sync. It gen-  
erates a complex waveform  
by forcibly resetting OSC1  
to the beginning of its cycle  
in synchronization with the  
OSC2 frequency. The effect  
is applied only to OSC1,  
and is not output to OSC2.  
This is available only if  
OSC1  
(=Output)  
OSC2  
OSC2 is an analog oscilla-  
tor. For even greater effec-  
tiveness, choose an analog  
oscillator for OSC1 as well,  
and set the OSC1 pitch  
higher than OSC2.  
Original Level  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Specifies the volume for the original sound of OSC1.  
(Modulator Original Level)  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “RING” or “FM.”  
Specifies the attack time of the OSC2 envelope.  
Attack  
(Modulator Attack Time)  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “ENV RING.”  
Specifies the release time of the OSC2 envelope.  
Release (Modulator Release Time)  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “ENV RING.”  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
COSM1/COSM2  
Here you can apply various effects to the sound. COSM effects are similar to the built-in effects (Tone-FX, reverb, chorus)  
or to conventional effect processors, but have the important difference that they are polyphonic, so that the effect is  
applied to each note you play.  
In the COSM section you can select from a total of sixteen types, organized into four categories according to sound.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
COSM Switch  
OFF, ON  
Switches the COSM on/off.  
fig.06b-50.eps_50  
COSM Switch  
COSM Type  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Value  
Description  
THRU, OD/DS,  
W-SHAPE, AMP,  
SPEAKER,  
Use this parameter to select from among the 16 available COSMs.  
For details on each COSM type, refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf”  
in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included CD-ROM.  
RESONATOR, SBF1/2,  
COMB, DUAL, TVF,  
DYN-TVF, COMP,  
LIMITER, F-SHIFT, LO-FI,  
TB FILTER  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
LFO  
fig.06b-51.eps_50  
For some COSM selections that you choose in COSM Type, you can make LFO settings. For details on LFO settings,  
refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p. 122).  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
TVA  
This section determines the volume and panning.  
TVA stands for Time Variant Amplifier, and controls the overall volume of each note you play, affecting aspects of the  
sound such as master volume (level), envelope, keyboard velocity, pan, and tremolo.  
TVA  
fig.06b-55-j.eps_50  
TVA Switch  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
TVA Switch  
Level  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
Switches the TVA on/off.  
Specifies the volume of the tone.  
Level KF (Level Keyfollow)  
-200– +200  
Use this parameter if you want the volume of the patch to change according  
to the key that is pressed. Relative to the volume at the C4 key (center C),  
positive (+) settings will cause the volume to rise for notes higher than C4,  
and negative (-) settings will cause the volume to fall for notes higher than  
C4. Larger settings will produce greater change.  
Level LFO Depth  
Pan  
-63– +63  
L64–0–63R  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the patch.  
Specifies the pan of the patch. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and “63R” is  
far right.  
Pan KF (Pan Keyfollow)  
-200– +200  
Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning. Positive (+) set-  
tings will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to be panned increas-  
ingly further toward the right, and negative (-) settings will cause notes higher  
than C4 key (center C) to be panned toward the left. Larger settings will pro-  
duce greater change.  
Pan  
R
+100  
+50  
o
L
0
-50  
-100  
Key  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
Pan LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
LFO  
fig.06b-56-j.eps_50  
LFO Switch  
Parameter  
LFO Switch  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
Switches LFO on and off.  
In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the TVA. For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making  
LFO Settings” (p. 122).  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Making Envelope Settings  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Velocity Curve  
(Envelope Velocity Curve)  
0–7  
Choose from the following seven curves to specify how your keyboard playing  
strength will affect the envelope depth. If you don’t want your keyboard playing  
strength to affect the envelope depth, set this to “0”.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Velocity Sens  
(Envelope Velocity Sensitiv-  
ity)  
-63– +63  
Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the envelope. If you  
want the envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes, set this parameter  
to a positive (+) value. If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly  
played notes, set this to a negative (-) value.  
Velocity A-Sens  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the attack time of the envelope. If you want  
attack time to be speeded up for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a pos-  
itive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the decay time of the envelope. If you want  
decay time to be speeded up for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a pos-  
itive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
This allows key release speed to affect the release time of the envelope. If you want  
release time to be speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a  
positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
(Envelope Attack Time Ve-  
locity Sensitivity)  
Velocity D-Sens  
(Envelope Decay Time Ve-  
locity Sensitivity)  
Velocity R-Sens  
(Envelope Release Time Ve-  
locity Sensitivity)  
ADSR Attack  
0–127, Note  
0–127, Note  
0–127  
Specifies the attack time of the envelope (the time from when you press a key until  
the envelope level reaches the maximum value).  
Specifies the decay time of the envelope (the time from when the envelope level  
reaches the maximum value until it falls to a constant value).  
Specifies the sustain level of the envelope (the level at which the envelope remains  
constant).  
(Envelope Attack Time)  
ADSR Decay  
(Envelope Decay Time)  
ADSR Sustain  
(Envelope Sustain Level)  
ADSR Release  
(Envelope Release Time)  
0–127, Note  
Specifies the release time of the envelope (the time from when you release a key  
until the envelope level reaches 0).  
“ENVELOPE” in the lower right of the screen shows a graphical representation of  
the envelope produced by the current settings.  
Env Time KF  
(Envelope Time Keyfollow)  
-200– +200  
Make this setting when you want the decay time and subsequent times of the enve-  
lope to be affected by the location of the key you play. Based on the envelope times  
for the C4 key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause notes higher than C4 to  
have increasingly shorter times, and negative (-) settings will cause them to have in-  
creasingly longer times. Larger settings will produce greater change.  
Time  
+100  
+50  
0
-50  
-100  
Key  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Making LFO Settings  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Waveform  
(LFO Waveform)  
SINE  
TRI  
Sine wave  
Triangle wave  
SAW  
SQR  
RND  
TRP  
Sawtooth wave  
Square wave  
Random wave  
Trapezoidal wave  
S&H  
CHAOS  
Sample & Hold wave (one time per cycle, LFO value is changed)  
Chaos wave  
Offset (LFO Offset)  
-100, -50, 0,  
+50, +100  
settings will move the waveform so that modulation will occur from the central  
value upward. Negative (-) settings will move the waveform so that modula-  
tion will occur from the central value downward.  
Key Sync  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
This specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin when the  
key is pressed (ON) or not (OFF).  
(LFO Key Sync Switch)  
Delay Time  
(LFO Delay Time)  
Delay Time (LFO Delay Time) specifies the time elapsed before the LFO effect  
is applied (the effect continues) after the key is pressed (or released).  
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 123), change the setting  
until the desired effect is achieved.  
Rate (LFO Rate)  
0–127, Note  
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.  
LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo  
that specifies the LFO cycle (Patch Tempo) is synchronized with the tempo set  
in a external sequencer.  
(Example)  
For a tempo of 120 (120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute (60 seconds))  
Setting  
(half note)  
1 second  
(60 / 60 =1 (second))  
(60 / 120= 0.5 (seconds))  
(eighth note) 0.25 seconds  
(60 / 240= 0.25 (seconds))  
This setting will be ignored if the Waveform parameter is set to “CHAOS.”  
Specifies how the LFO will be applied.  
Fade Mode (LFO Fade Mode)  
Fade Time (LFO Fade Time)  
ON <<,  
ON >>,  
OFF <<,  
OFF >>  
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 123), change the setting  
until the desired effect is achieved.  
Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum  
(minimum).  
0–127  
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 123), change the setting  
until the desired effect is achieved.  
“LFO Curve” in the lower right of the screen shows a wave graphic that corresponds to the current settings.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
How to Apply the LFO  
Apply the LFO gradually after the key is pressed  
Apply the LFO gradually after the key is  
fig.LFO-1.e  
released  
Delay  
high (more)  
fig.LFO-3.e  
Fade Time  
Time  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Delay  
high (more)  
Depth  
Time  
Fade Time  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Depth  
Note on  
Pan  
low (less)  
Pan Note Note  
on off  
low (less)  
Delay Time  
The time from when the keyboard is  
played until the LFO begins to be ap-  
plied.  
Delay Time  
The time from when the keyboard is re-  
leased until the LFO begins to be applied.  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
ON <<  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
OFF <<  
The time over which the LFO amplitude  
will reach the maximum after the Delay  
Time has elapsed.  
The time over which the LFO amplitude  
will reach the maximum after the Delay  
Time has elapsed.  
Apply the LFO immediately when the key is  
Apply the LFO from when the key is pressed  
pressed, and then gradually begin to decrease  
until it is released, and gradually begin to  
the effect  
decrease the effect when the key is released  
fig.LFO-2.e  
fig.LFO-4.e  
high (more)  
Delay Time  
Fade Time  
Delay  
high (more)  
Time  
Fade Time  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Depth  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Depth  
Note  
on  
Pan  
low (less)  
Pan  
low (less)  
Note  
on  
Note  
off  
Delay Time  
The time that the LFO will continue after  
the keyboard is played.  
Delay Time  
The time that the LFO will continue after  
the keyboard is released.  
OFF >>  
The time over which the LFO amplitude  
will reach the minimum after the Delay  
Time has elapsed.  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
ON >>  
The time over which the LFO amplitude  
will reach the minimum after the Delay  
Time has elapsed.  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
AP Syn (AP-Synthesis)  
AP-Synthesis is the world’s first sound generating technology that is able to apply the “behavioral model” of specific  
acoustic instruments to synthesizer sounds, thus creating new synth sounds that are overflowing with living expression.  
Conventional physical modeling sound generators model a musical instrument’s “structure” (such as the shape of the  
resonating body, the length of the tube, the materials of the vibrating part). In contrast, AP-Synthesis models the way  
in which specific instruments behave in response to performance techniques such as trills, portamento, vibrato, or  
changes in dynamics.  
Based on acoustic instruments that are considered particularly expressive lead instruments, the AP-Synthesis on the V-  
Synth GT provides five different models (phrase models): violin, erhu, sax, flute, and multifade.  
By applying the selected phrase model to one of 38 different AP-Synthesis source waves, you can create completely  
new “living synth sounds” that have never been heard before.  
fig.06b-60-j.eps_50  
AP-Synthesis Switch  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
AP-Synthesis Switch  
OFF, ON  
Switches AP-Synthesis on and off.  
Using the MODIFY knob (panel)  
If you hold down [SHIFT] and touch a knob graphic in the Modify screen (or the Advanced screen), you’ll be able  
to use the V-Synth GT’s front panel MODIFY knob to directly control the selected parameter. An “MD” indication  
will appear for a parameter that can be controlled with the MODIFY knob.  
fig.06b-69.eps_50, fig.06b-68-j.eps  
This is selected for direct control by the MODIFY knob.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Phrase Model  
fig.06b-61-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Source Waveform  
Soprano Sax  
Tenor Sax 1  
Tenor Sax 2  
Flute  
Specifies the source waveform.  
Shakuhachi 1  
Shakuhachi 2  
Quena Pipe  
Pan Pipes  
Shino Pipe  
Ryuteki Pipe  
Qudi Pipe  
Uilleann Pipes  
Oboe 1, Oboe 2  
Wood Winds  
Harmonica  
Trumpet  
Flugelhorn  
Violin  
Erhu 1, Erhu 2  
MG Saw  
Saw Wave 1  
Saw Wave 2  
Square Wave  
Pulse Wave  
Ramp Wave  
Triangle Wave  
Sine Wave  
Super Saw  
Detune Wave 1  
Detune Wave 2  
Detune Wave 3  
Detune Wave 4  
Detune Wave 5  
Synth Strings  
Robot Voice, Noise  
Phrase Model  
Violin  
Erhu  
Sax  
Flute  
Violin phrase model.  
Erhu phrase model.  
Sax phrase model.  
Flute phrase model.  
Multifade  
0–127  
L64–0–63R  
A model that is not categorized as a phrase model for the above instruments.  
The volume of AP-Synthesis.  
The panning (stereo position) of AP-Synthesis.  
Level  
Pan  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Pitch  
fig.06b-62-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pitch Coarse (Pitch Coarse Tune)  
Pitch Fine (Pitch Fine Tune)  
-48– +48  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone in semitone steps (+/-4 octaves).  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone in one-cent steps (+/-50 cents).  
1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone  
Octave Shift  
-3– +3  
Adjusts the pitch of the tone up or down in units of an octave (+/-3  
octaves).  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Modify (when Phrase Model is “Violin”)  
fig.06b-63-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Attack Time  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the attack of the sound. Positive (+) values will make the at-  
tack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack faster.  
Release Time  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the length of the release. Positive (+) values will lengthen the  
release, and negative (-) values will shorten it.  
Adjusts the volume of the attack that occurs for strong input veloci-  
ties (-100– +100). The volume will be louder for positive (+) values,  
or softer for negative (-) values.  
Fortissimo Atk Level  
(Fortissimo Attack Level)  
Scrape Nz Level  
(Scrape Noise Level)  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the noise of the bow scraping on the string.  
The volume will be louder for positive (+) values, or softer for neg-  
ative (-) values.  
Natural Feel  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the amount of variation in the sound. Positive (+) values will  
produce more variation, and negative (-) values will produce less.  
Adjusts the time from the beginning of the note until vibrato begins  
to be applied. Positive (+) values will lengthen the time until vibrato  
begins, and negative (-) values will shorten the time.  
Vibrato Dly Time  
(Vibrato Delay Time)  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the depth of vibrato when the dynamics are at the minimum.  
Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative (-) val-  
ues will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the vibrato rate. Positive (+) values will make the vibrato  
faster, and negative (-) values will make it slower.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Modify (when Phrase Model is “Erhu”)  
fig.06b-64-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Attack Time  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the attack of the sound. Positive (+) values will make the at-  
tack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack faster.  
Release Time  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the length of the release. Positive (+) values will lengthen the  
release, and negative (-) values will shorten it.  
Adjusts the speed of portamento. Positive (+) values will make por-  
tamento slower, and negative (-) values will make portamento fast-  
er.  
Porta Time (Portamento Time)  
Scrape Nz Level  
(Scrape Noise Level)  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the noise of the bow scraping on the string.  
The volume will be louder for positive (+) values, or softer for neg-  
ative (-) values.  
Natural Feel  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the amount of variation in the sound. Positive (+) values will  
produce more variation, and negative (-) values will produce less.  
Adjusts the time from the beginning of the note until vibrato begins  
to be applied. Positive (+) values will lengthen the time until vibrato  
begins, and negative (-) values will shorten the time.  
Vibrato Dly Time  
(Vibrato Delay Time)  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the depth of vibrato when the dynamics are at the minimum.  
Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative (-) val-  
ues will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the vibrato rate. Positive (+) values will make the vibrato  
faster, and negative (-) values will make it slower.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Modify (when Phrase Model is “Sax”)  
fig.06b-65-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Attack Time  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the attack of the sound. Positive (+) values will make the at-  
tack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack faster.  
Release Time  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the length of the release. Positive (+) values will lengthen the  
release, and negative (-) values will shorten it.  
Adjusts the speed of portamento when the portamento switch is on.  
Positive (+) values will lengthen the portamento time, and negative  
(-) values will shorten the portamento time.  
Porta Time (Portamento Time)  
Breath Nz Level  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the breath noise. Positive (+) values will in-  
crease the volume, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the amount of variation in the sound. Positive (+) values will  
produce more variation, and negative (-) values will produce less.  
Adjusts the time from the beginning of the note until vibrato begins  
to be applied. Positive (+) values will lengthen the time until vibrato  
begins, and negative (-) values will shorten the time.  
(Breath Noise Level)  
Natural Feel  
Vibrato Dly Time  
(Vibrato Delay Time)  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the depth of vibrato when the dynamics are at the minimum.  
Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative (-) val-  
ues will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the vibrato rate. Positive (+) values will make the vibrato  
faster, and negative (-) values will make it slower.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Modify (when Phrase Model is “Flute”)  
fig.06b-66-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Attack Time  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the attack of the sound. Positive (+) values will make the at-  
tack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack faster.  
Release Time  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the length of the release. Positive (+) values will lengthen the  
release, and negative (-) values will shorten it.  
Adjusts the volume of the slur noise (the transitional sound made  
when changing the pitch while continuing to produce sound). Posi-  
tive (+) values will make this volume louder, and negative (-) values  
will lessen it.  
Slur Nz Level (Slur Noise Level)  
Breath Nz Level  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the breath noise. Positive (+) values will in-  
crease the volume, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the amount of variation in the sound. Positive (+) values will  
produce more variation, and negative (-) values will produce less.  
Adjusts the time from the beginning of the note until vibrato begins  
to be applied. Positive (+) values will lengthen the time until vibrato  
begins, and negative (-) values will shorten the time.  
(Breath Noise Level)  
Natural Feel  
Vibrato Dly Time  
(Vibrato Delay Time)  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the depth of vibrato when the dynamics are at the minimum.  
Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative (-) val-  
ues will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the vibrato rate. Positive (+) values will make the vibrato  
faster, and negative (-) values will make it slower.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Modify (when Phrase Model is “Multifade”)  
fig.06b-67-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Attack Time  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the attack of the sound. Positive (+) values will make the at-  
tack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack faster.  
Release Time  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the length of the release. Positive (+) values will lengthen the  
release, and negative (-) values will shorten it.  
Adjusts the speed of portamento. Positive (+) values will lengthen  
the portamento time, and negative (-) values will shorten the porta-  
mento time.  
Porta Time (Portamento Time)  
Sub Tone Level  
Natural Feel  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the noise or sound that is heard in the back-  
ground. Positive (+) values will increase the volume, and negative  
(-) values will decrease it.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the amount of variation in the sound. Positive (+) values will  
produce more variation, and negative (-) values will produce less.  
Vibrato Dly Time  
(Vibrato Delay Time)  
Adjusts the time from the beginning of the note until vibrato begins  
to be applied. Positive (+) values will lengthen the time until vibrato  
begins, and negative (-) values will shorten the time.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the depth of vibrato when the dynamics are at the minimum.  
Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative (-) val-  
ues will produce less vibrato.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Adjusts the vibrato rate. Positive (+) values will make the vibrato  
faster, and negative (-) values will make it slower.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Advanced (when Phrase Model is “Violin”)  
fig.06b-70-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Brightness  
Value  
-2– +2  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (five steps). Positive (+) values  
will brighten the sound, and negative (-) values will darken it.  
Finger Nz Level  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the volume of the strings hitting the fingerboard. Positive (+)  
values will increase the volume, and negative (-) values will de-  
crease it.  
Adjusts the attack time when playing tenuto. Positive (+) values will  
make the attack slower, and negative (-) values will make the attack  
faster.  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced by the force of  
your keyboard playing. Positive (+) values will increase the lower  
limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced when you operate  
the controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will increase  
the lower limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the linkage between changes in dynamics and changes in  
vibrato depth. Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and  
negative (-) values will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the vibrato using the  
controller assigned to vibrato. Positive (+) values will make the re-  
sponse slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Finger Noise Level)  
Tenuto Atk Time  
(Tenuto Attack Time)  
Low Velo Limit  
(Low Velocity Limit)  
Low Dyn Ctrl Lmt  
(Low Dynamics Controller Limit)  
Vibrato Dyn Sens  
(Vibrato Dynamics Sensitivity)  
Vibrato Reac Tm  
(Vibrato Reaction Time)  
PitchBend Reac Tm  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you operate the pitch bender to con-  
trol the pitch. Positive (+) values will make the response slower, and  
negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Pitch Bend Reaction Time)  
Dyn Ctrl1 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 1 Reaction  
Time)  
Dyn Ctrl2 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 2 Reaction  
Time)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
Adjusts the amount of ambience. Positive (+) values will increase  
the amount of ambience, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Ambience Level  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Advanced (when Phrase Model is “Erhu”)  
fig.06b71-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Brightness  
Value  
-2– +2  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (five steps). Positive (+) values  
will brighten the sound, and negative (-) values will darken it.  
Low Velo Limit  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced by the force of  
your keyboard playing. Positive (+) values will increase the lower  
limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced when you operate  
the controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will increase  
the lower limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the linkage between changes in dynamics and changes in  
vibrato depth. Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and  
negative (-) values will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the vibrato using the  
controller assigned to vibrato. Positive (+) values will make the re-  
sponse slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Low Velocity Limit)  
Low Dyn Ctrl Lmt  
(Low Dynamics Controller Limit)  
Vibrato Dyn Sens  
(Vibrato Dynamics Sensitivity)  
Vibrato Reac Tm  
(Vibrato Reaction Time)  
PitchBend Reac Tm  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you operate the pitch bender to con-  
trol the pitch. Positive (+) values will make the response slower, and  
negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Pitch Bend Reaction Time)  
Dyn Ctrl1 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 1 Reaction  
Time)  
Dyn Ctrl2 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 2 Reaction  
Time)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
Adjusts the amount of ambience. Positive (+) values will increase  
the amount of ambience, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Ambience Level  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Advanced (when Phrase Model is “Sax”)  
fig.06b-73-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Brightness  
Value  
-2– +2  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (five steps). Positive (+) values  
will brighten the sound, and negative (-) values will darken it.  
Scoop Depth  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the amount of scoop. Positive (+) values will increase the  
amount of scoop, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the volume of key noise. Positive (+) values will increase the  
volume, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the dynamics at which growl will begin to be applied. Pos-  
itive (+) values will broaden the range to which growl is applied,  
and negative (-) values will narrow the range.  
Key Nz Level (Key Noise Level)  
Growl Sens (Growl Sensitivity)  
Low Velo Limit  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced by the force of  
your keyboard playing. Positive (+) values will increase the lower  
limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced when you operate  
the controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will increase  
the lower limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the linkage between changes in dynamics and changes in  
vibrato depth. Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and  
negative (-) values will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the vibrato using the  
controller assigned to vibrato. Positive (+) values will make the re-  
sponse slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Low Velocity Limit)  
Low Dyn Ctrl Lmt  
(Low Dynamics Controller Limit)  
Vibrato Dyn Sens  
(Vibrato Dynamics Sensitivity)  
Vibrato Reac Tm  
(Vibrato Reaction Time)  
PitchBend Reac Tm  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you operate the pitch bender to con-  
trol the pitch. Positive (+) values will make the response slower, and  
negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Pitch Bend Reaction Time)  
Dyn Ctrl1 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 1 Reaction  
Time)  
Dyn Ctrl2 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 2 Reaction  
Time)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
Adjusts the amount of ambience. Positive (+) values will increase  
the amount of ambience, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Ambience Level  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Advanced (when Phrase Model is “Flute”)  
fig.06b-74-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Brightness  
Value  
-2– +2  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (five steps). Positive (+) values  
will brighten the sound, and negative (-) values will darken it.  
Low Velo Limit  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced by the force of  
your keyboard playing. Positive (+) values will increase the lower  
limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced when you operate  
the controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will increase  
the lower limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Adjusts the linkage between changes in dynamics and changes in  
vibrato depth. Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and  
negative (-) values will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the vibrato using the  
controller assigned to vibrato. Positive (+) values will make the re-  
sponse slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Low Velocity Limit)  
Low Dyn Ctrl Lmt  
(Low Dynamics Controller Limit)  
Vibrato Dyn Sens  
(Vibrato Dynamics Sensitivity)  
Vibrato Reac Tm  
(Vibrato Reaction Time)  
PitchBend Reac Tm  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you operate the pitch bender to con-  
trol the pitch. Positive (+) values will make the response slower, and  
negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
(Pitch Bend Reaction Time)  
Dyn Ctrl1 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 1 Reaction  
Time)  
Dyn Ctrl2 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 2 Reaction  
Time)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response  
quicker.  
Adjusts the amount of ambience. Positive (+) values will increase  
the amount of ambience, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Ambience Level  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Advanced (when Phrase Model is “Multifade”)  
fig.06b-75-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Brightness  
Value  
-2– +2  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness of the sound (five steps). Positive (+) values will  
brighten the sound, and negative (-) values will darken it.  
Porta Depth (Portamento Depth)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the amount of pitch change produced by portamento. Positive  
(+) values will increase the amount of pitch change, and negative (-) val-  
ues will decrease it.  
Adjusts the initial tone balance for fade 1 immediately after the sound  
is selected (before you operate a controller).  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Adjusts the initial tone balance for fade 2 immediately after the sound  
is selected (before you operate a controller).  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Fade1 Ctl Default  
(Fade 1 Control Default)  
Fade2 Ctl Default  
(Fade 2 Control Default)  
Low Velo Limit  
(Low Velocity Limit)  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced by the force of your  
keyboard playing. Positive (+) values will increase the lower limit value,  
and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Low Dyn Ctrl Lmt  
(Low Dynamics Controller Limit)  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the lower limit of the dynamics produced when you operate the  
controller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will increase the low-  
er limit value, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Vibrato Dyn Sens  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the linkage between changes in dynamics and changes in vibra-  
to depth. Positive (+) values will produce deeper vibrato, and negative  
(-) values will produce less vibrato.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the vibrato using the control-  
ler assigned to vibrato. Positive (+) values will make the response slow-  
er, and negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you modify the tone by operating the  
controllers assigned to fade 1 and 2. Positive (+) values will make the  
response slower, and negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
(Vibrato Dynamics Sensitivity)  
Vibrato Reac Tm  
(Vibrato Reaction Time)  
Fade Ctrl Reac Tm  
(Fade Controller Reaction Time)  
PitchBend Reac Tm  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you operate the pitch bender to control  
the pitch. Positive (+) values will make the response slower, and nega-  
tive (-) values will make the response quicker.  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the con-  
troller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the response  
slower, and negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
(Pitch Bend Reaction Time)  
Dyn Ctrl1 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 1 Reaction  
Time)  
Dyn Ctrl2 Reac Tm  
(Dynamics Controller 2 Reaction  
Time)  
-100– +100  
-100– +100  
Adjusts the reaction time when you control the dynamics using the con-  
troller assigned to dynamics. Positive (+) values will make the response  
slower, and negative (-) values will make the response quicker.  
* This may not work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Adjusts the amount of ambience. Positive (+) values will increase the  
amount of ambience, and negative (-) values will decrease it.  
Ambience Level  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Control 1  
fig.06b-76.eps_50  
Parameter name  
Controller  
(can be changed using VALUE)  
Reverse switch  
Reverses the direction in which  
the controller will operate.  
Parameter  
Dynamics Ctrl1  
(Dynamics Controller 1)  
Description  
Controls the dynamics.  
* If the Phrase Model is Multifade, this may not work for some selections of  
Source Waveform.  
Dynamics Ctrl2  
(Dynamics Controller 2)  
Controls the dynamics.  
* If the Phrase Model is Multifade, this may not work for some selections of  
Source Waveform.  
Fade 1  
Fade 2  
Controls the amount of fade 1.  
* This can be specified only if the Phrase Model is “Multifade.” This may not  
work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Controls the amount of fade 2.  
* This can be specified only if the Phrase Model is “Multifade.” This may not  
work for some selections of Source Waveform.  
Portamento  
Vibrato  
Controls portamento on/off.  
* This is not supported by the Phrase Model “Flute.”  
Controls the rate and depth of vibrato.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Control 2  
fig.06b-77-ps.eps_50  
Parameter name  
Controller  
(can be changed using VALUE)  
Reverse switch  
Reverses the direction in which  
the controller will operate.  
Parameter  
Tremolo  
Description  
Switches to a tremolo sound.  
* This can be specified only if the Phrase Model is “Violin.”  
Pizzicato  
Switches to pizzicato.  
* This can be specified only if the Phrase Model is “Violin.”  
Mono/Poly  
Switches to an always-layered sound.  
* This can be specified only if the Phrase Model is “Violin.”  
Mix Level  
Pan  
Controls the volume.  
Controls the panning.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Tone-FX (Tone Effect)  
The V-Synth GT contains three high-quality effects: Tone-FX (tone effect), Chorus, and Reverb. The tone effect can be  
applied to individual tones, and the amount of signal sent to chorus and reverb can be specified for each tone.  
Routing  
The effect blocks are displayed as small rack units. By turning each effect on/off you can freely specify the connecting  
path (signal flow).  
fig.06b-80-j.eps_50  
Tone-FX On/Off Switch  
Tone-FX Type  
Tone-FX Master Level  
Tone-FX Chorus Send Level  
Tone-FX Reverb Send Level  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
TVA Tone-FX Send  
(TVA Tone-FX Send Level)  
0–127  
Sets the level of the signal sent to Tone-FX.  
TVA CHO Send  
0–127  
0–127  
T-FX  
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.  
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.  
(TVA Chorus Send Level)  
TVA REV Send  
(TVA Reverb Send Level)  
TVA Output Assign  
Outputs the direct sound in stereo through Tone-FX. You can also apply cho-  
rus or reverb to the sound that passes through Tone-FX.  
MAIN  
DIR  
Outputs the direct sound to the MAIN OUT jacks in stereo without passing  
through Tone-FX.  
Outputs the direct sound to the DIRECT OUT jacks in stereo without passing  
through Tone-FX. Make this setting when you want to use external effects.  
AP Syn Tone-FX Send  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
T-FX  
Sets the level of the signal sent to Tone-FX.  
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.  
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.  
(AP Syn Tone-FX Send Level)  
AP Syn CHO Send  
(AP Syn Chorus Send Level)  
AP Syn REV Send  
(AP Syn Reverb Send Level)  
AP Syn Output Assign  
Outputs the direct sound in stereo through Tone-FX. You can also apply cho-  
rus or reverb to the sound that passes through Tone-FX.  
MAIN  
DIR  
Outputs the direct sound to the MAIN OUT jacks in stereo without passing  
through Tone-FX.  
Outputs the direct sound to the DIRECT OUT jacks in stereo without passing  
through Tone-FX. Make this setting when you want to use external effects.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Parameter  
Tone-FX  
(Tone-FX On/Off Switch)  
Tone-FX Type  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
Switches Tone-FX on and off.  
00 (Thru)–41  
desired Tone-FX from 41 different types. For details on each Tone-FX type,  
refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the includ-  
ed CD-ROM.  
Tone-FX Master Level  
Tone-FX To CHO  
(Tone FX Chorus Send Level)  
0–127  
0–127  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the Tone-FX.  
Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through Tone-FX. If  
you don’t want to add the Chorus effect, set it to “0.”  
Tone-FX To REV  
(Tone-FX Reverb Send Level)  
0–127  
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through Tone-FX. If you  
don’t want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”  
CHO  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–08  
0–127  
These parameters can be specified individually for each patch.  
For details, refer to “Effects (Setting Effects for a Patch)” (p. 76).  
(Chorus On/Off Switch)  
CHO Type  
(Chorus Type)  
CHO Master Level  
(Chorus Master Level)  
CHO To REV  
(Chorus Reverb Send Level)  
0–127  
REV  
OFF, ON  
(Reverb On/Off Switch)  
REV Type (Reverb Type)  
REV Master Level  
(Reverb Master Level)  
00 (Off)–13  
0–127  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Com  
OSC1/2  
MOD  
COSM1/2  
TVA  
AP Syn  
Effects  
Tone-FX  
fig.06b-81.eps_50  
Parameter  
Tone-FX Switch  
Tone-FX Type  
Value  
OFF, ON  
00 (Thru)–41  
Description  
Switches the Tone-FX on/off.  
Use this parameter to select from among the 41 available Tone-FX.  
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the Tone-FX that is se-  
lected by the Tone-FX Type setting. For details on each Tone-FX type, refer to  
“COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the included CD-  
ROM.  
When you touch <Search>, the Tone-FX Type List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the Tone-FX from the list.  
Chorus  
This effect is applied to the entire patch.  
For details, refer to “Effects (Setting Effects for a Patch)” (p. 76).  
Reverb  
This effect is applied to the entire patch.  
For details, refer to “Effects (Setting Effects for a Patch)” (p. 76).  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Using Steps to Vary the Sound (Multi Step Modulator)  
The Multi Step Modulator is a function that modulates the value of various parameters according to a sixteen-step  
sequence. On the V-Synth GT, the patterns of this sequence are managed as “tracks.” You can simultaneously use up  
to four tracks, with each track containing a different sequence. You can use the panel knobs to freely modify the  
sequence pattern.  
1. Press [PATCH] to access the Patch Play screen.  
2. Touch <Step Mod>.  
fig.03-step04  
<Step Mod>  
The Multi Step Modulator screen will appear.  
fig.03-step02  
Multi Step Modulator Switch  
3. Turn <Multi Step Modulator Switch> ON.  
The Multi Step Modulator will be applied to the currently selected patch.  
4. Touch < A >–< D > to turn tracks on/off as desired.  
* If you turn all of the tracks off, there will be no effect even if <Multi Step Modulator Switch> is ON.  
fig.StepModTrackSW  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
5. Make settings for the track.  
Touch one of the tabs for a track name you turned on in step 4.  
fig.StepModTrackSW2  
6. While playing the keyboard to hear the sound, input steps 1–8.  
The V-Synth GT’s E1–E8 knobs correspond to knobs 1–8 and 9–16. To switch between 1–8 and 9–16, hold down  
[SHIFT] and use [ ] [ ] (the frame in the screen will move). According to how you turn the knob, the effect  
will be shown as a graph of 1--16 steps, and the color will change.  
fig.06b-85.eps  
You’ll be able to draw the graph directly with your finger.  
fig.handdrow001  
If you touch < SMOOTH >, the graph will be smoothed. This will make the change in the sound occur gradually,  
producing a more LFO-like result.  
The step bar shown at the far right (number 17) is the same as the one that appears at the far left (number 1). This is  
helpful when you’re setting up a looping sequence.  
The parameter that is modulated by each track will depend on the tone. In the screen, you can touch Destination to  
change the assigned parameter.  
7. In the same way, make settings for other tracks you turned on in step 4.  
8. If you want to stop using the step sequence, turn <Multi Step Modulator Switch> OFF.  
For details regarding each parameter, refer to “Multi Step Modulator” (p. 144).  
9. Press the panel [EXIT] button to exit the Step Modulator screen.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Multi Step Modulator  
fig.06b-80.eps  
Multi Step Modulator Switch  
Step Indicator  
Step Bar  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Multi Step Modulator Switch  
OFF, ON  
This turns the multi step modulator on/off.  
* This setting applies to all tracks  
(Track A–D).  
Step Indicator  
Step Bar  
This indicates the current location within the step sequence.  
This graphically shows the sixteen steps. The step bar shown at the far right  
(number 17) is the same as the one that appears at the far left (number 1).  
This is helpful when you’re setting up a looping sequence.  
If you touch < SMOOTH >, the graph will become a (smooth) line graph.  
If you touch < STEP >, the graph will become a bar graph.  
Step knobs  
Use these knobs to input the sixteen steps.  
The V-Synth GT’s E1–E8 knobs correspond to knobs 1–8 and 9–16. To  
switch between 1–8 and 9–16, hold down [SHIFT] and use [  
] [  
]
(the frame in the screen will move). According to how you turn the knob,  
the effect will be shown as a graph of 1--16 steps, and the color will  
change.  
fig.06b-85.eps  
When the cursor is at a step knob, you can hold down [SHIFT] and turn  
the VALUE dial to simultaneously modify the value of all steps.  
Key Sync  
Off  
Part  
The step sequence will not be reset when a note-on occurs.  
The step sequence will be reset when a note-on occurs, but will not be reset  
if the key was played legato.  
(Step Modulator Key Sync)  
* This setting applies to all tracks  
(Track A–D).  
Voice  
The step sequence will be reset each time a note-on occurs.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Tone (Pro Edit)  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Track Button A–D  
(Step Modulator Track Buttons A–  
D)  
OFF, ON  
These turn the multi step modulator on/off for the four tracks (A–D).  
Track TAB A–D  
(Step Modulator Track Tabs A–D)  
These access the editing screens for the four multi step modulator tracks (A–  
D).  
Loop (Step Modulator Loop Switch)  
Grid (Step Grid)  
OFF, ON  
Note  
This turns looping on/off for the step sequence.  
This specifies the note value of each step.  
(Quarter note), (Eighth note),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note)  
(Sixteenth note), (Dotted sixteenth note),  
End P (Step Modulator End Point)  
Dir (Step Modulator Direction)  
1–16  
FWD1–3,  
BWD1–3  
This specifies the sequence length as a number of steps.  
This specifies the direction in which the step sequence will play.  
1 2 3 • • • 14 15 16  
FWD1  
1 2 3 • • • 14 15 16  
FWD2  
2 3 • • • 14 15  
1 2 3 • • • 14 15 16  
FWD3  
1 2 3 • • • 14 15 16  
16 15 14 • • • 3 2 1  
BWD1  
16 15 14 • • • 3 2 1  
BWD2  
15 14 • • • 3 2  
16 15 14 • • • 3 2 1  
BWD3  
16 15 14 • • • 3 2 1  
Zone (Step Modulator Zone)  
1–16  
This specifies the zone (p. 88) to which the step modulator will be applied.  
Destination  
(Step Modulator Destination)  
The parameter that is controlled by the step sequence will depend on the  
tone.  
STEP/SMOOTH  
(Step/Smooth Switch)  
STEP,  
SMOOTH  
Touch < SMOOTH > to select a line graph (smooth change), or touch <STEP  
> to select a bar graph (stepped change).  
Multi Step Modulator Menu  
Reset Value  
Invert Value  
Reverse Value  
Shift Value R  
Shift Value L  
Resets the step bar.  
Inverts the step bar in the vertical direction.  
Inverts the step bar in the left/right direction.  
Moves the step bar one step toward the right.  
Moves the step bar one step toward the left.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vocal Designer  
If you select structure type 5, you’ll be able to use Vocal Designer.  
Vocal Designer is a function that uses cutting-edge human vocal modeling technology. By connecting a mic to the V-  
Synth GT and playing the keyboard while you sing, you can model an extremely realistic and natural singing voice.  
fig.06d-01-j.eps  
<VOCAL DESIGNER>  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
How Vocal Designer is Structured  
Vocal Designer consists of four elements: the mic, OSC1/2 (carrier), the vocoder, and effects.  
fig.06d-02-j.eps  
Vocoder  
Effects  
Carrier  
This corresponds to the vocal cords  
of a human. The signal on which  
the sound is based (tone and pitch)  
is produced according to the  
pitches you play on the keyboard.  
On the V-Synth GT, this consists of  
the combination of the OSC,  
COSM, MOD, and TVA.  
From the audio signal received via  
the mic input, this extracts the  
various resonances (formants)  
caused by the shape and  
Here you can apply a tone  
effect, reverb, and chorus.  
framework of the throat and the  
movement of the mouth, and uses  
these formants to modulate the  
signal received from the carrier.  
OSC1  
MOD COSM1 COSM2 TVA  
OSC2  
With the default values immediately  
after initialization, these will be  
arranged in structure 1. However, if  
you want to use the arrangement of  
a structure 2–4, you can temporarily  
select the appropriate structure 1–4,  
then re-select structure 5 to obtain  
the desired arrangement of 2–4.  
Mic  
This is the mic connected to the rear panel.  
Mic OSC1/2  
(Carrier)  
Vocoder  
Effects  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
Using Vocal Designer  
Connecting a Mic  
1. Connect your mic to the “MIC IN jack.”  
2. Press INPUT [SETTING] on the panel.  
The Audio Input Settings screen will appear.  
fig.06d-16-ps.eps_50  
3. Check the mic settings.  
fig.06d-17.eps_50  
While vocalizing into the mic, use the panel’s INPUT MIC LEVEL knob to adjust the volume so that the Level  
indicator in the screen does not quite light red.  
If the Peak indicator lights, the volume is too high.  
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
Make settings for Vocal Designer  
1. Select structure type 5.  
• Select Structure Type 5 in the Pro Edit screen (p. 86).  
• Press STRUCTURE [5], then touch <VOCAL DESIGNER> in the Patch Play screen.  
fig.06d-01-j.eps  
<VOCAL DESIGNER>  
Make sure that UPPER or LOWER is lit as the KEY MODE of the patch for which Vocal Designer is selected.  
2. Play the keyboard.  
3. While continuing to hold down notes, vocalize into the mic.  
The sound using Vocal Designer will be heard according to the volume of your voice.  
Even if you’re playing the keyboard, Vocal Designer won’t produce sound unless you are vocalizing into the mic.  
Likewise, even if you’re vocalizing into the mic, Vocal Designer won’t produce sound unless you’re playing the  
keyboard; you must be doing both.  
4. In the lower part of the screen, touch <Vocal Designer>, <Mic Settings>, and <Vocoder>.  
In each screen, make mic settings and vocoder settings.  
fig.06d-06-j.eps  
<Vocoder>  
<Mic Settings>  
<Vocal Designer>  
<Pro Edit>  
The sound will stop if you switch the oscillator waveform (p. 150) while holding down a key. If this occurs, release  
the key and press it again.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vocal Designer  
Vocal Designer  
fig.06d-10-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Vocal Designer Switch  
OFF, ON  
Turns Vocal Designer on/off.  
Mic  
Level  
0–127  
Indicates the mic input level.  
Use the panel INPUT MIC LEVEL knob to adjust the level so that the peak in-  
dication does not light.  
Carrier  
OSC1 (Oscillator 1 Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the sound from OSC1 will be used as the carrier (ON) or  
not (OFF).  
Selects the waveform that OSC1 will produce.  
OSC1 Waveform  
(Oscillator 1 Waveform)  
OSC1 Level (Oscillator 1 Level)  
OSC2 (Oscillator 2 Switch)  
0–127  
OFF, ON  
Specifies the level of OSC1.  
Specifies whether the sound from OSC2 will be used as the carrier (ON) or  
not (OFF).  
OSC2 Waveform  
(Oscillator 2 Waveform)  
Selects the waveform that OSC2 will produce.  
OSC2 Level (Oscillator 2 Level)  
Vocoder  
0–127  
Specifies the level of OSC2.  
Level  
Natural Voice  
0–127  
0–127  
Specifies the volume of Vocal Designer.  
Specifies the volume of the mic input sound (your own voice).  
Effects  
Chorus Send (Chorus Send Level)  
Reverb Send (Reverb Send Level)  
0–127  
0–127  
Specifies the level of the signal sent to chorus.  
Specifies the level of the signal sent to reverb.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Vocal Designer  
Mic Settings  
fig.06d-04-j.eps  
Vocal Designer  
TVA  
Vocoder  
Tone-FX  
Mic  
Settings  
Mic effects such as equalizer are provided to enhance the mic input.  
As mic effects, equalizer (EQ), noise suppressor (Noise Sup), and compressor (Comp) are provided.  
These mic effect settings can be stored together as mic settings, and called up when necessary.  
Eight sets of mic settings can be stored. This allows you to easily use settings for Vocal Designer that are appropriate  
for a particular situation.  
Note that when you edit the parameter value, the mic setting will also change simultaneously (and will be  
automatically saved).  
Mic settings are System settings. They will be remembered even when you turn off the power. If you want to return all  
eight mic settings to the factory-set condition, execute a Factory Reset (p. 235).  
Mic Type  
fig.06d-11-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Vocal Designer Mic Settings  
Mic Setting  
1–8  
Selects the mic setting.  
Edit Mic Name  
Assigns a name for the mic setting.  
When you touch this, the Mic Setting Name screen will appear.  
Here you can assign a name to the mic setting in the same way as  
when assigning a name to a patch, etc. (p. 59).  
Mic Level  
Level  
0–127  
Adjusts the volume of the mic input.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Vocal Designer  
EQ  
Equalizer: Adjusts the character of the low, mid, and high-frequency ranges.  
The EQ settings are shown by the graph in the middle of the screen.  
fig.06d-12-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mic/EQ Switch  
OFF, ON  
Turns the equalizer on/off.  
3 Band EQ  
EQ Low Freq (EQ Low Frequency)  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125,  
160, 200, 250, 315,  
400, 500, 630, 800,  
1000, 1250, 1600,  
2000, 2500, 3150,  
4000 Hz  
Specifies the center frequency at which the low-frequency range  
will be adjusted.  
EQ Low Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
Specifies the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low-frequency  
range. Positive settings will boost the low-frequency range.  
EQ Mid Freq (EQ Mid Frequency)  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125,  
160, 200, 250, 315,  
400, 500, 630, 800,  
1000, 1250, 1600,  
2000, 2500, 3150,  
4000, 5000, 6300,  
8000, 10000, 12500,  
16000, 20000 Hz  
Specifies the center frequency at which the mid-frequency range  
will be adjusted.  
EQ Mid Gain  
EQ Mid Q  
-15– +15 dB  
Specifies the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the mid-frequency  
range. Positive settings will boost the mid-frequency range.  
Specifies the width of the mid-frequency range. Higher settings will  
narrow the range.  
0.3, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0,  
1.5. 2.0, 2.5. 3.0, 3.5,  
4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0,  
10.0, 12.0, 14.0,  
16.0, 18.0, 20.0  
EQ Hi Freq (EQ High Frequency)  
EQ Hi Gain (EQ High Gain)  
2000, 4000, 5000,  
6300, 8000, 10000,  
12500, 16000, 20000  
Hz  
Specifies the center frequency at which the high-frequency range  
will be adjusted.  
-15– +15 dB  
Specifies the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-frequency  
range. Positive settings will boost the high-frequency range.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
Noise Sup  
Noise suppressor: Suppresses noise when no sound is being input.  
fig.06d-13-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mic/Noise Suppressor Switch  
NS Threshold  
(Noise Suppressor Threshold)  
OFF, ON  
-60– -36dB  
Turns the noise suppressor on/off.  
Specifies the level at which the noise suppressor begins to operate. Sounds  
below the specified level will be muted.  
NS Attack  
0–127  
0–127  
Specifies the duration over which the noise suppressor will disable muting.  
(Noise Suppressor Attack)  
NS Release  
(Noise Suppressor Release)  
Specifies the time from when the noise suppressor begins operating until mut-  
ing occurs.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
Comp  
Compressor: Reduces high-level sounds and boosts low-level sounds, thus improving the overall volume balance of  
the sound.  
fig.06d-14-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mic/Compressor Switch  
CP Ratio (Compressor Ratio)  
OFF, ON  
1:1.0–1:16,  
1:INF  
Turns the compressor on/off.  
Specifies the compression ratio.  
CP Threshold  
(Compressor Threshold)  
-36–0dB  
Specifies the level at which compression will begin.  
CP Attack (Compressor Attack)  
CP Release (Compressor Release)  
CP Gain (Compressor Gain)  
0–100  
Specifies the time from when the input exceeds the Threshold until the volume  
begins to be compressed.  
Specifies the time it is to take after the input falls below the Threshold before  
compression ceases.  
0–100  
0–24 dB  
Specifies the output gain.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vocal Designer  
Vocoder  
fig.06d-05-j.eps  
Vocal Designer  
TVA  
Vocoder  
Tone-FX  
Mic  
Settings  
You can use these settings to modify the character of the vocal sound created by Vocal Designer.  
Choose one of the following four vocoder types, which will determine the character of the sound.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Vocoder Type  
Stereo  
This produces a spacious stereo sound. It is suitable for simulating choral sounds such as  
choir or chorus.  
Mono  
This type emphasizes the intelligibility of the vocal. It is suitable for creating solo vocal  
sounds. The output will be mono.  
Vintage  
Enhance  
This produces the typical “vocoder sound.” It is suitable for obtaining the sound of a vintage  
vocoder such as the VP-330.  
This type boosts the high-frequency range. Use this when you want to emphasize the clarity  
of the vocal sound.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Vocal Designer  
Stereo/Mono/Enhance  
fig.06d-xxx-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Formant Type  
Value  
Flat  
Description  
No conversion.  
Soprano  
Alto 1  
Alto 2  
Baritone  
Bass  
Transforms the mic input sound into the specified voice range.  
“TalkBox” is suitable for obtaining metallic talkbox-type sounds.  
TalkBox  
(Mono only)  
Level  
Attack  
0–127  
0–100  
Specifies the volume of Vocal Designer.  
Specifies the attack time of the Vocal Designer sound relative to the mic input  
sound.  
Release  
0–100  
0–127  
0–100  
Specifies the release time of the Vocal Designer sound relative to the mic in-  
put sound.  
Specifies the level at which the consonants extracted from the mic input  
sound will be output.  
Specifies the degree to which consonants will be detected in the mic input  
sound. Higher settings will make it easier for consonants to be detected.  
Consonant Level  
Consonant Detect  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Vocal Designer  
Vintage  
fig.06d-21-ps.eps  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Vocoder  
EQ Low Freq  
200–800 Hz  
Specifies the center frequency at which the low-frequency range will be  
boosted or cut.  
EQ Low Gain  
Hi Cut Switch  
-15– +15dB  
OFF, ON  
Specifies the amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range.  
Turns the high-frequency cut on/off. If you feel the sound is raspy, turn this  
switch on to make the sound smoother.  
Level  
Attack  
0–127  
0–100  
Adjusts the volume of Vocal Designer.  
Specifies the attack time of the Vocal Designer sound relative to the mic input  
sound.  
Release  
1–100  
0–127  
Specifies the release time of the Vocal Designer sound relative to the mic in-  
put sound.  
Specifies the level at which the consonants extracted from the mic input  
sound will be output.  
Specifies the frequency used when extracting the high-frequency components  
from the mic input audio as consonants. Components higher than the speci-  
fied frequency will be extracted as consonants.  
Consonant Level  
Consonant HPF Freq  
4500–9000  
Hz  
Chorus  
Vintage Vocoder Chorus Switch  
Chorus Rate  
Chorus Depth  
OFF, ON  
0.05–10.0 Hz  
0–127  
This is an on/off switch for the chorus effect applied to the vocal sound.  
Adjusts the modulation frequency of the chorus effect.  
Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect.  
Chorus Balance  
D:0:100E–  
D:100:0E  
Adjusts the balance between the vocal sound and the sound with chorus ap-  
plied.  
Chorus HPF Cutoff  
Chorus Pre Delay  
200–8000 Hz  
0.0–100 ms  
Specifies the frequency at which the high-frequency range will be cut.  
Specifies the delay time until the chorus sound is heard.  
The chorus of the Vintage vocoder is applied separately from the patch effect named Chorus.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing a Tone (SOUND SHAPER II)  
By using the “Sound Shaper II” function you can edit the tone simply by turning knobs or pressing buttons.  
1. Access the Patch Play screen, and select the tone whose settings you wish to modify.  
2. Touch <SOUND SHAPER II>.  
fig.06c-01-j.eps  
<SOUND SHAPER II>  
The SOUND SHAPER II window will appear.  
Adjust the sound by operating the switches and knobs while you play the keyboard.  
In the case of Structures 1–4  
fig.06c-02-ps.eps_50  
The most suitable parameters for OSC will be assigned.  
Mono/Poly  
Switch  
Portamento Switch  
OSC1 Switch  
OSC2 Switch  
OSC1 Level  
OSC2 Level  
OSC 1/2 wave (Touch to view a list.)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Editing a Tone (SOUND SHAPER II)  
In the case of Structure 5  
fig.soundshape03  
Mic Level  
The most suitable parameters for editing  
the vocoder will be assigned.  
OSC1/2 Switch  
Vocoder Type  
OSC1/2 Wave  
(Touch to view a list.)  
Cho/Rev Send Level  
Adjust the OSC 1/2 level.  
3. Touch <COSM> to make COSM settings (p. 160).  
4. Touch <AP-Synthesis> to make AP-Synthesis settings (p. 161).  
5. Touch <Effects> to make effect settings (p. 162).  
6. Save the tone you created (p. 81).  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Tone (SOUND SHAPER II)  
COSM  
Here you can use the [E1]–[E8] knobs to edit the most important COSM parameters.  
fig.06c-xx-ps.eps_50  
COSM1 Type  
COSM2 Switch  
COSM2 Type  
COSM1 Switch  
The most suitable parameters for COSM will be assigned.  
1. Use the COSM 1/2 switches to turn COSM 1/2 on/off.  
2. Touch the screen to select the COSM 1/2 types.  
You can also change the type by using the VALUE dial or [INC/+] [DEC/-].  
3. Use the [E1]–[E8] knobs to edit the COSM 1/2 parameters.  
For details on each parameter, refer to “COSM1/COSM2” (p. 117) or “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS  
LIST” folder on the included CD-ROM.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing a Tone (SOUND SHAPER II)  
AP-Synthesis  
Here you can use the [E1]–[E8] knobs to edit the most important AP-Synthesis parameters.  
fig.06c-10-ps.eps_50  
AP-Synthesis Switch  
Source Wave  
Phrase Model  
AP-Synthesis Modify Parameters  
AP-Synthesis Level  
1. Use the AP-Synthesis switch to turn AP-Synthesis on/off.  
2. Use the [E1] knob to select the source wave.  
3. Touch the screen to select the desired phrase model.  
The available phrase models will depend on the source wave you’ve selected.  
4. Use the [E2] knob to edit the AP-Synthesis level.  
5. Use the [E3]–[E8] knobs to edit the AP-Synthesis parameters.  
For details on each parameter, refer to “AP Syn (AP-Synthesis)” (p. 124).  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing a Tone (SOUND SHAPER II)  
Effects  
Here you can use the [E1]–[E8] knobs to edit the most important parameters of each effect.  
fig.06c-20-ps.eps_50  
TONE-FX/CHORUS/  
REVERB Type  
TONE-FX/CHORUS/REVERB Parameter  
(The most suitable parameters are assigned.)  
TONE-FX/CHORUS/REVERB Switch  
1. Use the effect switches to turn each effect on/off.  
2. Select the desired type for each effect.  
3. Use the [E1]–[E8] knobs to edit the parameters of each effect.  
You can also edit the parameters by using the VALUE dial or [INC/+] [DEC/-].  
For details on the parameters of each effect, refer to “COSM_EffectsList(E).pdf” in the “EFFECTS LIST” folder on the  
included CD-ROM.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
In this chapter, we will explain the procedures for:  
• Sampling (p. 163)  
• Editing samples (p. 178)  
• Converting samples so the VariPhrase function can be used (Encoding) (p. 187)  
Sampling  
What is a Template? (Settings before you sample)  
and metronome settings described below).  
You can store eight different sampling templates. When you sample, you will always select one of these eight  
templates.  
With the factory settings, eight sampling templates are preset.  
For details on modifying the settings, refer to “Sampling Procedure” (p. 165).  
Sampling templates are system settings (with the exception of some metronome parameters). They are remembered  
even when you turn off the power. If you wish to restore all eight sampling templates to the factory settings, perform  
the Factory Reset operation (p. 235).  
Applications of Each Template  
The preset templates cover different input settings and pre-effect types.  
Mic  
Sample in mono from a mic. Connect a mic to the rear panel MIC IN jack.  
Line  
Connect your portable audio player or similar device to the INPUT jack on the rear panel.  
Coaxial  
Sample a digital signal. Connect your audio device to the rear panel COAXIAL IN connec-  
tor.  
Resampl  
Comp  
Play a sample on the V-Synth GT and sample the result. This is called “resampling.” For  
details on resampling, refer to p. 173.  
Use the compressor pre-effect. The sample will be recorded from the rear panel INPUT  
jacks.  
Limiter  
MIDI  
Use the limiter pre-effect. The sample will be recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
Start sampling when a sequencer start (system realtime message: FA) is received. The sam-  
ple will be recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
USB  
Sampling from a PC USB Audio.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sample Mode  
Factory Settings of Each Template  
Setup  
Sampling Type  
Input Source  
Trigger Mode  
Trigger Level  
Pre Trigger  
Pre Gain  
PreFX Type  
PreFX COMPRESSOR Sustain  
PreFX COMPRESSOR Attack  
PreFX COMPRESSOR Tone  
PreFX COMPRESSOR Level  
PreFX LIMITER Thres  
PreFX LIMITER Release  
PreFX LIMITER Tone  
PreFX LIMITER Level  
PreFX LIMITER Ratio  
PreFX NOISE SUPR Threshold  
PreFX NOISE SUPR Release  
MetroType  
Mic  
MONO  
ANALOG  
MANUAL  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
0
0
Line  
STEREO  
ANALOG  
LEVEL  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
Coaxial  
STEREO  
COAXIAL  
LEVEL  
-24 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
0
0
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
OFF  
Resampl  
STEREO  
RESAMPL  
NOTE  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
0
0
0
0
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
OFF  
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
Count-In  
1MEASURE  
1MEASURE  
Setup  
SamplingType  
InputSource  
TriggerMode  
TriggerLevel  
PreTrigger  
Pre Gain  
PreFxType  
PreFx COMPRESSOR Sustain  
PreFx COMPRESSOR Attack  
PreFx COMPRESSOR Tone  
PreFx COMPRESSOR Level  
PreFx LIMITER Thres  
PreFx LIMITER Release  
PreFx LIMITER Tone  
PreFx LIMITER Level  
PreFx LIMITER Ratio  
PreFx NOISE SUPR Threshold  
PreFx NOISE SUPR Release  
MetroType  
Comp  
STEREO  
ANALOG  
MANUAL  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
COMP+NS  
64  
12  
0
0
-48  
0
0
0
Limiter  
STEREO  
ANALOG  
MANUAL  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
LIMIT+NS  
0
0
0
0
-36  
80  
0
0
MIDI  
STEREO  
ANALOG  
MIDI  
-12 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
USB  
STEREO  
USB  
LEVEL  
-24 (dB)  
0 (msec)  
0 (dB)  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
-48  
0
0
0
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
OFF  
0
0
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
4:1  
-60  
0
REC  
1.5:1  
-60  
0
REC  
OFF  
Count-In  
1MEASURE  
1MEASURE  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
Sampling Procedure  
Here’s how to input a sound from the input jacks and sample it. For resampling, refer to the following section.  
The V-Synth GT has the following input jacks.  
• INPUT L, R  
• MIC IN (mixed into INPUT R)  
• DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE  
OPTICAL IN  
COAXIAL IN  
USB (Audio)  
Use the input jack that is appropriate for your situation.  
• Monaural sampling from a mic  
MIC IN  
• Sampling from an analog source  
INPUT L, R  
• Sampling from a digital source  
OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN  
• Sampling via USB  
USB  
983  
Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:  
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.  
3. Lowering volume levels.  
When sampling, you must make sure that the following two items are set correctly. If these two settings are  
incorrect, the sample will not be recorded as you intend.  
• What type of sample are you recording? (stereo or mono)  
In the Sampling General screen, set Sampling Type.  
• Which input are you sampling from? (select the input jack)  
In the Sampling General screen, set Input Source.  
If you have set the metronome (p. 176), the metronome sound will be output from the DIRECT OUT jacks during  
sampling. However, the sound that is assigned to the DIRECT OUT jacks (p. 139) will not be output.  
1. Press [SAMPLE].  
The Sample Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
2. Select the location (sample number) that you wish to sample.  
Move the cursor to the desired sample. Normally, you will select a sample that has no wave; i.e., a sample number  
whose name is “NO SAMPLE.”  
In this screen you can use the following functions.  
• Select a sample by directly touching it.  
• Change the number in steps of eight by pressing [  
• Change the number in steps of one by touching <  
] [ ].  
>< >, located beside the sample list, by pressing  
[
] [  
] [INC/+] [DEC/-], or by turning the VALUE dial.  
• Scroll the sample list by dragging the scroll bar located beside the sample list up or down.  
• Move to the number 001 sample by touching <Top>.  
• Move to the number 999 sample by touching <End>.  
• Display information on the currently selected sample by touching <Info> (p. 192). However, this information  
will not be displayed for the factory-set waves.  
• Audition the currently selected sample by touching <Prevw>.  
• When you touch <Search Empty>, you will jump to the “NO SAMPLE” sample number that follows the  
current sample number.  
3. Touch <Sampling>.  
The Sampling Template screen appears.  
fig.04-02_50  
4. Touch <TMPL 1>–<TMPL 8> to select a sampling template.  
If you want to modify the settings of the selected sampling template, perform the following steps 5–7.  
5. Touch one of the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen to access the corresponding setting screen.  
<General>: Setup settings (p. 174)  
<Pre-Effect>: Pre-effect settings (p. 175)  
<Metronome>: Metronome settings (p. 176)  
For details on each parameter, refer to the page references given.  
6. In each setting screen, touch the touch panel to set the parameters.  
Move the cursor to the value box of the parameter you want to edit, and use any of the following methods to edit it.  
• Turn the VALUE dial  
• Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]  
• Drag your fingertip on the touch panel  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Mode  
7. Adjust the sampling level.  
Adjust the volume of the device that is producing the sound.  
When sampling from the MIC IN jack, adjust the level by turning the front panel INPUT MIC LEVEL knob.  
When sampling from the INPUT jacks, press the INPUT [SETTING] button on the front panel, and in the Audio  
Input Settings screen that appears, use <Input Gain> to adjust the level.  
If you are sampling from the DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE IN connector, use the setup Pre gain (p. 174) or the  
8. Touch <START> to start sampling.  
The way in which sampling will start depends on the Trigger Mode setting in the Sampling General screen, as  
follows.  
If “MANUAL” is selected, sampling will start after a count of the number of measures specified by the metronome  
Count-In setting.  
If “MIDI” is selected, sampling will wait for the sequencer to start (system realtime message: FA). Sampling will  
begin when the sequencer start message is received.  
If “LEVEL” is selected, sampling will wait for an input signal. Sampling will begin when the input signal exceeds  
the level specified by Trigger Level (p. 174).  
If “NOTE” is selected, Sampling will begin when you play the keyboard or note message is received.  
If you have selected “MIDI” or “LEVEL,” you can touch <START> once again to begin sampling without waiting for  
the sequencer to start or the input signal to be received.  
In the Sampling window, “Remain Time” indicates the remaining time (in seconds) available for sampling.  
If memory becomes full, sampling will be halted. If this occurs, delete unneeded samples from memory (p. 172).  
9. When you are finished sampling, touch <STOP>.  
The display will indicate “COMPLETED!” Touch <PREVIEW> to hear the sound that you sampled, and check  
whether the sample was recorded as you wish.  
<Cancel>: Discard the sample that you just recorded, and return to the Sampling Template screen.  
<OK>: Finalize the sample that you just recorded, and register it in the sample list.  
<RETRY>: Discard the sample that you just recorded, and sample once again.  
10.If you’re satisfied with the sound you sampled, touch <OK>.  
The sampled sound will be registered in the sample list.  
• If you want to discard the sample and try again, touch <RETRY>.  
<RETRY> will change to <START>, and now you can touch <START> to sample again.  
• If you want to stop sampling, touch <Cancel> to return to the Sampling Template screen.  
Even if you touch <OK> to register the sample in the sample list, that assignment is temporary, and will be lost when  
you turn off the power. If you want to keep the sample, you must name the sample (p. 168) and save it (p. 191).  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Mode  
Sample Name (Naming a Sample)  
Assign a new name to the sample. You can assign a name consisting of up to twelve characters.  
1. Access the Sample Top screen, and select the sample that you want to name (p. 178).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Sample Name>.  
The Sample Name window appears.  
fig.04-04_50  
4. Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
< << >< >> >  
<shift>  
<clear all>  
<back space>  
<delete>  
Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input location.  
Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters or symbols.  
Erases all characters in the text box.  
Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
5. When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the sample name.  
If you want to return to the original unedited name, touch <EXIT>.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sample Mode  
Sample Copy (Copying a Sample)  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Sample Copy>.  
The Sample Copy window appears.  
fig.04-04a_50  
4. Move the cursor to “Source” and select the copy-source sample.  
5. Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the copy-destination sample.  
When you touch <Search>, the Sample List window will appear, allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
6. Touch <Execute> to execute the copy operation.  
7. Press [EXIT].  
The Sample Copy window closes.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Sample Move (Moving a Sample)  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Sample Move>.  
The Sample Move window appears.  
fig.04-04b_50  
4. Move the cursor to “Source” and select the move-source sample.  
5. Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the move-destination sample.  
When you touch <Search>, the Sample List window will appear, allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
6. Touch <Execute> to execute the move operation.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Sample Exchange (Exchanging a Sample)  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Sample Exchange>.  
The Sample Exchange window appears.  
fig.04-04c_50  
4. Move the cursor to “Source” and select the exchange-source sample.  
5. Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the exchange-destination sample.  
When you touch <Search>, the Sample List window will appear, allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
6. Touch <Execute> to execute the exchange operation.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Sample Delete (Deleting a Sample)  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Sample Delete>.  
The Sample Delete List window appears.  
fig.04-04d_50  
4. From the list, select the sample that you want to delete.  
To select the sample, turn the VALUE dial, press [INC/+] [DEC/-], or press [  
You can also select this by directly touching it in the touch panel.  
] [  
].  
5. Touch <Execute>.  
The selected sample will be deleted.  
6. If you want to continue deleting other samples, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
7. Press [EXIT].  
The Sample Delete List window closes.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Resampling  
The V-Synth GT is able to resample samples from its internal memory. This is called resampling. In actuality, the sounds  
that are output from the rear panel MAIN OUT L/MONO, R jacks are sampled.  
For example, you could sample multiple samples played simultaneously, and record them as a single sample. You can  
conserve voices in this way.  
fig.04-05.e  
Pre Gain  
INPUT  
Sampling  
OUTPUT  
Pre-FX  
Sound  
Effect  
Generator  
Before you enter Sample mode, make settings so that you can play the sample(s) you wish to resample.  
The resampling procedure is essentially the same as the “Sampling Procedure” described in the preceding section.  
However, please be aware of the following points.  
• You must set the Input Source in the Sampling General screen to “RESAMPL.”  
• To adjust the sampling level, adjust the setup Pre gain (p. 174) and the pre-effect Output Level (p. 175).  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Sampling General (Setup Settings)  
fig.04-06_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Sampling Type  
STEREO L R  
MONO MIX  
MONO L  
MONO R  
ANALOG  
USB  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
RESAMPL  
Samples in stereo.  
Mixes the signals input to L and R, and sample in monaural.  
Samples the L input signal in monaural.  
Samples the R input signal in monaural.  
Samples from INPUT jacks or MIC IN jack.  
The sound from USB audio will be sampled.  
Samples from OPTICAL IN connector.  
Samples from COAXIAL IN connector.  
Select this when you wish to resample. The sound that is output to MAIN OUT  
L/MONO and R will be sampled.  
Sampling will begin when you touch <START>.  
Sampling will begin when an external sequencer start message (system real-  
time message: FA) is received.  
Input Source  
Trigger Mode  
MANUAL  
MIDI  
LEVEL  
Sampling will start when the input signal exceeds the level specified by the  
Trigger Level setting.  
NOTE  
Sampling will begin when you play the keyboard or note message is re-  
ceived.  
Trigger Level  
-–00 dB  
Specifies the input level at which sampling will begin when the Trigger Mode  
is set to “LEVEL.” The trigger level is shown by the “  
level meter located at the right of the screen.  
” and “  
” in the  
If Trigger Mode is set to other than “LEVEL,” this parameter has no effect.  
Pre Trigger  
Pre Gain  
0–1000 msec  
-12– +36 dB  
After the selected trigger to start sampling has been received, previously re-  
ceived data for the length of time specified here will be included in the sam-  
pled data. When the Trigger Mode is set to “LEVEL” and the early portion of  
the sample is being lost, you can use this setting to include the early portion.  
Adjusts the input gain. This will apply to the sound that is received from all  
input jacks. It will also be applied to the sound being resampled. With posi-  
tive (+) values, the gain will be higher than originally, and with negative (-)  
values the gain will be lower than originally.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Sample Mode  
Sampling Pre-Effect (Pre-Effect Settings)  
fig.04-07_50  
There are three pre-effects: compressor, limiter, and noise suppressor. By using these you can adjust the level of the  
sound being sampled.  
Compressor  
Limiter  
Noise Suppressor  
By reducing high levels and raising low levels, this effect smoothes out unevenness in volume.  
By compressing sounds that exceed a specified volume level, this effect prevents the sound from distorting.  
This effect leaves the original sound untouched, but mutes the noise that is heard during periods of silence.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Type (Pre-Effect Type)  
OFF  
No pre-effect will be used.  
COMP+NS  
LMT+NS  
NS  
Compressor and noise suppressor will be used.  
Limiter and noise suppressor will be used.  
Noise suppressor will be used.  
Compressor  
Sustain  
0–127  
Specifies the time over which a low-level signal is raised until it reaches a  
fixed volume.  
Attack (Attack Time)  
Tone  
Level (Output Level)  
Limiter  
0–127  
-50– +50  
0– +24 dB  
Specifies the attack time of the input sound.  
Adjusts the tone quality of the compressor.  
Adjusts the output volume.  
Thres (Threshold Level)  
Release (Release Time)  
-60–0 dB  
0–127  
Specifies the level (threshold level) at which the limiter will begin to function.  
Specifies the time from when the input level drops below the threshold level  
until the limiter turns off.  
Tone  
-50– +50  
0– +24 dB  
1.5:1, 2:1,  
4:1, 100:1  
Adjusts the tonal quality of the limiter.  
Adjusts the output volume.  
Specifies the compression ratio.  
Level (Output Level)  
Ratio  
Noise Suppressor  
Threshold (Threshold Level)  
-60–0 dB  
0–127  
Specifies the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to operate. When  
the signal falls below the specified level, it will be muted.  
Specifies the time from when the noise suppressor begins to operate until the  
volume reaches 0.  
Release (Release Time)  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Sample Mode  
Metronome (Metronome Settings)  
fig.04-08_50  
Parameter  
Metro Type  
(Metronome Type)  
Value  
OFF  
REC  
Description  
The metronome will not sound.  
The metronome will sound only during sampling.  
ALWAYS  
The metronome will sound whenever you sample (including while you are  
making settings in preparation for sampling).  
Level (Metronome Level)  
Count In  
0–127  
OFF  
1MEASURE  
2MEASURE  
Specifies the volume of the metronome.  
A count will not be sounded before sampling.  
A one-measure count will be sounded before sampling.  
A two-measure count will be sounded before sampling.  
* If Trigger Mode is set to other  
than “MANUAL,” this  
parameter has no effect.  
Tempo  
Beat  
20.0–250.0  
0–31  
Specifies the tempo of the metronome.  
Specifies the time signature of the metronome (Numerator).  
* If you set this to 0, no time signature accent note will be sounded.  
Specifies the time signature of the metronome (Denominator).  
2, 4, 8, 16,  
32  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sample Mode  
Template Name (Naming a Template)  
A template can be given a name of up to eight characters.  
1. Access the Sampling Template screen, and select the sample that you want to name (p. 165).  
2. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-09_50  
3. In the pulldown menu, touch <Template Name>.  
The Sampling Template Name window appears.  
fig.04-10_50  
4. Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
< << >< >> >  
<shift>  
<clear all>  
<back space>  
<delete>  
Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input location.  
Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters or symbols.  
Erases all characters in the text box.  
Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
5. When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the template name.  
If you want to return to the original unedited name, touch <EXIT>.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sample Mode  
Editing a Sample  
When you have finished sampling, you can edit the sample data.  
When editing a sample, touching <PREVIEW> will play the sample so you can check whether it was edited as you  
expect.  
When the editing screens are displayed, playing the keyboard will not produce sound.  
It is not possible to edit two or more samples simultaneously.  
With some exceptions, editing a sample that has been encoded will cause the encoding data to be discarded. In this  
case, you must encode the data once again (p. 187).  
The factory-set waves (preset waves) cannot be edited.  
Common Procedure for Editing  
Displaying the Sample Edit Screen  
1. Press [SAMPLE].  
The Sample Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
2. Select the sample that you wish to edit.  
For details on making this selection, refer to “Sampling Procedure” (p. 165).  
3. Touch <Edit>.  
The Sample Edit screen appears.  
fig.04-11_50  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sample Mode  
4. Touch one of the tabs in the left side of the screen to access the desired editing screen.  
<Edit>: Edit the sample of the specified region (p. 182)  
<Loop FWD>: Specify the loop region for forward playback (p. 185)  
<Loop BWD>: Specify the loop region for backward playback (p. 185)  
For details on each editing operation, refer to the corresponding page.  
5. When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT] to return to the Sample Top screen.  
Functions Common to All Editing Screens  
“Start,” “End,” and “Current” Settings  
The V-Synth GT uses seven terms to indicate locations within a sample.  
Sample Start  
Beginning of the sample  
Sample End  
End of the sample  
Loop Start, Loop End  
Edit Start, Edit End  
Current  
When the Loop Play is ON, the region between these two points will be played repeatedly.  
Editing will affect the region between these two points.  
This is the currently selected location of the sample.  
Move the cursor to “Start,” “End,” or “Current” to select the point that you want to specify. Then specify the location  
by turning the VALUE dial, by using [INC/+] [DEC/-], or by dragging your finger over the sample in the screen.  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End is displayed with the color inverted.  
When Current = Loop/Edit Start, moving Loop/Edit Start will cause Current to change as well.  
It is not possible to move Loop/Edit Start to the right of Loop/Edit End.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
(LENGTH LOCK)  
This locks the length of the region between the start point (Start) and end point (End) of the sample. It is convenient to  
use this when you already know the length of the sample that you need, and want to find the right region to use.  
After the length has been locked, you can turn the VALUE dial, use [INC/+] [DEC/-], or drag your finger over the  
sample in the screen to adjust the Start and End locations while maintaining the distance between these two points.  
You can also use Adjust or Zero Cross Search while the length of the sample is locked.  
(LOOP)  
This switches loop playback on/off. Turn this on if you want the loop region specified in the Loop FWD/BWD screen  
to play repeatedly.  
(PREVIEW)  
This plays the sample. During playback, you can touch this once again to stop playback.  
(Adjust)  
In the Loop FWD/BWD screen, the Adjust function moves the Loop Start, Loop End, or Current locations to the nearest  
of the following locations 1–5.  
In edit screens, the Adjust function moves the Edit Start, Edit End, or Current locations to the nearest of the following  
locations 1–7.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sample Start location  
Sample End location  
Loop Start location  
Loop End location  
Current location  
Edit Start location  
Edit End location  
Move the cursor to the point that you want to adjust (“Start,” “End,” or “Current”), and touch  
or  
.
Touching will move the point toward the left, and touching will move it toward the right.  
In the Sample Encode screen (p. 187), this will move the Current location to the closest event.  
For example, if you wish to touch <PREVIEW> to check whether the results of your editing were satisfactory, you can  
jump the current location.  
In some cases nothing may happen, due to the relation between points or the Length Lock setting.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sample Mode  
(Zero Cross Search)  
This function searches for locations where the sample has a value of zero. When setting loop points or when cutting  
the sample, you should search for locations where the sample value is zero so that noise is not heard when you play  
the sample.  
Move the cursor to the point (“Start,” “End,” or “Current”) for which you want to find a zero-cross point, and then touch  
or  
.
Touching  
will search toward the left, and touching  
will search toward the right.  
(Zoom)  
This expands or shrinks the displayed sample.  
In any screen that displays the sample, you can touch the following buttons to expand or shrink the displayed sample.  
: Shrink vertically  
: Expand vertically  
: Shrink horizontally  
: Expand horizontally  
fig.04-12.e  
Zoom bar  
Zoom bar  
Actual length of wave  
The vertical zoom bar indicates the magnification of the sample in the vertical direction. The horizontal zoom bar  
indicates the magnification of the sample in the horizontal direction, and shows the current location. As the display is  
magnified, the zoom bar will become narrower.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Editing the Specified Region of the Sample  
You can specify a region of the sample, and edit the region by cutting or copying.  
Basic Operation  
1. Access the Sample Edit screen (p. 178).  
2. Specify the region that you want to edit (Edit Start–Edit End), or the Current location (p. 179).  
3. Touch <MENU> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-16_50  
4. In the pulldown menu, touch the editing function that you want to execute.  
A window appears, asking you to confirm the operation.  
fig.04-17_50  
editing function.  
5. Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the editing function.  
• If you want to cancel without executing, touch <Cancel>.  
• By touching “Undo” in the pulldown menu, you can return to the state prior to executing the  
operation (Undo). Depending on the type of edit function you execute, or on the state of the work  
area, there may be cases in which the Undo function cannot be executed. In such cases, you will  
not be able to select <Undo>.  
6. If you want to save the edited result, perform the Save operation (p. 191).  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Sample Editing Functions  
fig.04-18  
Cut  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be cut.  
Truncate  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be kept, and the remainder  
of the sample will be deleted.  
Copy  
Clear  
Paste  
The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be copied.  
The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be set to values of zero.  
The copied data will be overwritten, beginning at the current location.  
If there is any sample data following the current location, it will be lost as far as the  
pasted portion extends.  
Insert  
The copied data will be inserted at the current location.  
You can cut, paste, and insert between different samples. After copying, press [EXIT] to  
return to the Sample Top screen. Select a different sample, access the Sample Edit screen,  
and then paste or insert.  
Zero Insert  
This operation inserts silent space at the current location. It can also be used to lengthen a  
In the Sample Edit Zero Insert window, specify the length of the silent region that you want  
to insert. This setting is made in terms of a number of samples. Data in the V-Synth GT is  
handled as 44.1 kHz data, meaning that one second contains 44,100 data samples.  
For example, if you wish to insert one second of silence, you would specify “44100” and  
execute Zero Insert.  
If the amount of remaining memory is small, it may not be possible to execute Copy,  
Paste, Insert, or Zero Insert. In such cases, delete unneeded samples from memory (p.  
172).  
LR-Mix  
The stereo sample will be mixed to L, converting it into a monaural sample. If this is set to  
monaural, less wave memory will be used. This will also decrease the number of voices.  
Trim (Trimming)  
If the beginning and end of the sample are values other than zero, noise will be heard when  
you play the sample. Trim sets the values at the beginning and end of the sample to zero.  
In the Sample Edit Trim window, specify the length that you want to trim. This setting is  
made in terms of a number of samples. Data in the V-Synth GT is handled as 44.1 kHz  
data, meaning that one second contains 44,100 data samples.  
For example, trimming at 100 samples. This will connect the first data sample and the  
one hundredth data sample by a smooth line of one hundred points. Similarly, the last  
data sample and the data sample one hundred samples before it will be connected by a  
smooth line of one hundred points.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sample Mode  
Normalize  
The Normalize operation is used to uniformly increase or decrease the level of the entire  
sample without allowing it to distort. This is used when you wish to make the volume con-  
sistent with other samples.  
In the Sample Edit Normalize window, specify the degree of normalization that you want  
to use. The value is specified in terms of a percentage.  
For example, let’s suppose that 100 is the maximum volume at which the volume does not  
distort. Executing the Normal operation at a setting of 90% will make the maximum value  
of the sample be 90.  
If you normalize at a low setting and then normalize at a high setting, the audio quality  
will deteriorate. This means that if you intend to normalize several times, you should start  
from the higher value and work downward.  
Reverse  
Region  
The sample will be reversed between Edit Start and Edit End. If you want the sample to play  
backwards, execute Reverse to reverse the sample from the beginning.  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End can be stored in internal memory  
as a separate sample. The original sample will remain unchanged.  
Perform the following procedure.  
1. Select the region that you want to extract as a separate sample, and execute Region.  
2. In the Sample Edit Region window, select the sample number to which you want to paste  
the extracted region of the sample, and touch <OK>.  
3. Assign a name to the new sample, and touch <OK>.  
If in step 2 you select a sample number that already has a sample, the sample data  
between Edit Start and Edit End will be added to the end of the selected sample.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
Loop Region Settings  
When the loop switch (p. 180) is ON, you can specify the region that will be played back as a loop. The region of  
the sample between Loop Start and Loop End will be played back repeatedly.  
In the Sample Loop FWD screen that appears when you touch <Loop FWD>, specify the loop region for forward  
playback. In the Sample Loop BWD screen that appears when you touch <Loop BWD>, specify the loop region for  
backward playback.  
fig.04-13_50  
Immediately after sampling or loading a sample, Loop Start will be set to the beginning of the sample and Loop End  
to the end of the sample.  
If you set Loop Start and Loop End to locations within the sample, the sample will play back from the beginning, and  
then the region between Loop Start and Loop End will play back repeatedly.  
fig.04-14.e  
Wave  
Start  
Loop  
Start  
Loop  
End  
Wave  
End  
The data in the V-Synth GT is handled as 44.1 kHz data, which means there are 44,100 data samples per second.  
The shortest possible loop that can be set is 16 data samples.  
Loop range settings are ignored when the Playback Mode (p. 99) is set to “STEP” or “EVENT.”  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
Original Tempo Setting  
The Original Tempo is the reference tempo of the sample used when synchronizing it to the master tempo.  
Example: A sample whose original tempo is 100  
If the master tempo is set to 200 and the sample is synchronized, the sample will play back at double the speed at  
which it was recorded. If you set the master tempo to 50 and synchronize the sample, it will play back at half the speed  
at which it was recorded.  
fig.04-15_50  
The exact original tempo can be calculated from the time signature, number of measures, and number of beats for the  
sample length between Loop Start and Loop End. This means that you must first specify the loop region, and then set  
the original tempo.  
If you wish to play back a loop while simultaneously synchronizing another sample, you must specify the correct  
original tempo. If you fail to do this, the sounds will drift out of synchronization.  
1. Move the cursor to the item that you wish to set.  
2. Either turn the VALUE dial or press [INC/+] [DEC/-] to set the “Sign” (time signature), “Meas” (measure), and Beat  
values.  
3. Touch  
.
The precise tempo will be displayed at the right of the “–>.” The tempo displayed here is the original tempo.  
You can also move the cursor to the original tempo, and set it by rotating the VALUE dial or by using [INC/+] [DEC/-].  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sample Mode  
Encode (Converting the Sample to V-Synth GT Data)  
After you have finished editing the sample, you should encode it. By using the encoding that is appropriate for the  
sample, you’ll be able to maintain a higher quality of audio while controlling the pitch, time, and formant.  
The factory-set waves (preset waves) cannot be encoded.  
Displaying the Encode Screen  
Samples whose wave is too short (0.1 sec or less) cannot be encoded, and the Sample Encode screen cannot be  
accessed for such samples.  
1. Press [SAMPLE].  
The Sample Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
2. Select the sample number that you wish to encode.  
For details on how to select a sample, refer to “Sampling Procedure” (p. 165).  
3. Touch <Encode>.  
The Sample Encode screen appears.  
fig.04-20_50  
To Execute the Encode Operation  
In the Sample Encode screen, select the encode type, set the encode depth, and delete or add events. Then touch <Execute>.  
If you wish to stop the encode during the operation, touch <Abort>.  
When encoding is completed, you will return to the Sample Top screen.  
For details on these settings, refer to the following sections.  
The amount of time required by the encoding process will depend on the sample. You may need to wait a certain  
amount of time for encoding to be completed.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sample Mode  
Selecting the Encoding Type  
fig.04-21  
LITE  
This is the simplest encoding type. When you sample on the V-Synth GT, this type is selected  
by default. This type can be used with a variety of sounds, but to obtain the highest quality  
we recommend that you encode using one of the other types.  
SOLO  
This is suitable for monophonic vocals or monophonic wind instruments (such as sax, trum-  
pet, or flute). If you encode the sample using this type, you will be able to control the for-  
mant (p. 112) and use the robot voice function (p. 99). Even if you encode using SOLO,  
you can still play the sample polyphonically.  
BACKING  
ENSEMBLE  
This is suitable for decay-type instruments. It is particularly suitable for phrases that include  
instruments with a clear attack (such as drums, percussion, and guitar chords).  
This is suitable for sustain-type instruments. It is particularly suitable when there are smooth  
changes in tone (such as choir or strings).  
• If the data is encoded using “BACKING” or “ENSEMBLE,” it will not be possible to use the formant control or  
robot voice functions.  
• Once a sample has been encoded, editing that sample (except for some operations) will cause the encoded  
data to be discarded. If you then access the Sample Encode screen in this state, “LITE” will always be  
selected as the encoding type. Select the appropriate encoding type, and then re-encode the sample.  
• Depending on the sample, encoding with “SOLO” may cause the sound to be different than you expect, such  
as changes in pitch being incorrect by one octave. If this occurs, re-encode the sample using “BACKING” or  
“ENSEMBLE.”  
• If a sample that contains large amounts of reverb or delay is encoded using “SOLO,” it may not sound as  
you expect. If this occurs, re-encode the sample using “BACKING” or “ENSEMBLE.”  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sample Mode  
Automatically Detecting Events  
By specifying the Depth, you can automatically detect and “”mark locations where there is a strong attack (i.e.,  
locations where the volume changes abruptly). Such marked locations are called events.  
fig.04-22  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Depth (Encode Depth)  
0–127  
In the Sample Encode screen, move the cursor to “Depth” and set the value.  
The higher the value you set, the more events will be assigned.  
If the Playback Mode (p. 99) is “STEP,” the sample will play to the next  
event, and then stop each time you play the key. When the Playback Mode  
is set to “EVENT,” the sample will be divided at event locations, and  
assigned to each key.  
• If you set Depth to a high value, a large number of events may  
be detected. If you encode in such a state, the interval  
between events will be too short, and the expected result will  
not be obtained when you play back in event units.  
• If you change the location of an event after encoding, you  
must re-encode the sample. When you encode, the newly  
detected event locations will take effect.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Deleting and Adding Events  
Setting the Encode Depth and automatically detecting events does not guarantee that the events will be added at the  
locations that you expect. If necessary, you can delete or add events as you like.  
In the Sample Encode screen, you can touch <PREVIEW> to play the sample from the current location until the next  
event.  
By touching <PREVIEW>, you can play the sample to see whether events have been assigned to the locations that you  
expect.  
Be aware that if you change the encode depth after deleting or adding events, the events that were modified  
manually will be discarded, and the events that were detected by depth will be displayed.  
If you modify the location of events after encoding, you must re-encode. The modified location of the events will take  
effect when you encode.  
Deleting an Event  
1. Move the cursor to “Current.”  
2. By turning the VALUE dial, pressing [INC/+] [DEC/-], or dragging your finger over the sample in the screen, set  
Current to the location of the event that you want to delete.  
3. Touch either  
or  
.
The Current location will move to the location of the next event toward the left or right.  
4. Repeat step 3 to move Current to the location of the event that you wish to delete.  
5. Touch  
to delete the event.  
The events at the beginning and end of a sample cannot be deleted.  
Adding an Event  
1. Move the cursor to “Current.”  
2. By turning the VALUE dial, pressing [INC/+] [DEC/-], or dragging your finger over the sample in the screen, move  
Current to the location at which you want to add the event.  
3. Touch  
to add the event.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample Mode  
Saving a Sample  
Samples that you sample or encode will be lost when you turn off the power. If you want to keep these samples, use  
the Save Project screen in the Utility Menu.  
When you edit the settings of a sample, an asterisk (*) will appear at the left of the sample name in the Sample Browser  
screen. When you save the sample to internal memory or USB memory, the asterisk (*) will disappear.  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <Save>.  
Jump to the Save Project screen in the Utility Menu.  
fig.06-06_50  
For details on operations in this screen, refer to “Save Project (Saving a Project)” (p. 217).  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Mode  
Checking Sample Information  
1. Access the Sample Top screen (p. 165).  
2. Touch <Info>.  
The Sample Information screen appears.  
fig.04-10a_50  
In the Sample Information screen you can check the following information for the sample.  
• Encode type (p. 188)  
• Sampling type (p. 174)  
• Loop point location (Loop Start, Loop End) (p. 185)  
• Time signature (p. 186)  
• Original tempo (p. 186)  
• Original pitch  
• Original fine tune  
Original Tempo, Original Pitch, and Original Fine Tune can be modified in this screen.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Original Pitch  
C-1 (0)–  
G9 (127)  
Specifies the key that will play the sample at the pitch at which it was sam-  
pled.  
Original Fine Tune  
LOOP MODE  
-50– +50  
One Shot  
One Way  
Alternate  
Adjusts the current pitch in one-cent steps (1/100 of a semitone) over a  
range of 1/2 semitone upward or downward.  
The sample will not loop, regardless of the Loop Switch (p. 99) setting of the  
patch.  
If the Loop Switch (p. 99) of the patch is on, the sample will loop in the for-  
ward direction between “LOOP START” and “LOOP END.”  
If the Loop Switch (p. 99) of the patch is on, the sample will loop alternately  
backward and forward between the “LOOP START” and “LOOP END.”  
3. When you have finished viewing the information, touch <OK> to close the window.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the V-Synth GT, such as tuning and MIDI message reception,  
are referred to as system functions. This section explains how to make settings for the System functions and describes  
the functions of the different System parameters.  
How to Make the System Function Settings  
1. Press [SYSTEM].  
fig.08-01-ps.eps_50  
Tabs  
Editing Groups  
2. The parameters are organized into several editing groups. Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
select the edit group containing the parameters you want to set.  
4. Touch the various screens in which settings are made to edit the parameters.  
Move the cursor to the value box of the parameter you want to edit, and perform any of the following actions.  
• Turn the VALUE dial  
• Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]  
• Drag your fingertip on the touch panel  
5. Changes you make to the System function settings are only temporary—they will be discarded as soon as the  
power is turned off. If you want to keep any changes you’ve made in the system settings, you must save them in  
internal memory (p. 194).  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
System Menu  
System Write (Saving the System Settings)  
Changes you make to the System function settings are only temporary—they will be discarded as soon as the power  
is turned off. If you want to keep any changes you’ve made in the system settings, you must save them in internal  
memory.  
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost. However,  
the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure.  
1. After you have edited the settings of the System function, touch <MENU>, located in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.08-25-ps.eps_50  
2. In the pulldown menu, touch <System Write>.  
A window like the following will appear.  
fig.08-26.eps_50  
3. Touch <OK>.  
The system settings will be saved, and you’ll be returned to the Patch Edit screen.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
System Init (Initializing the System Settings)  
The current settings of the system functions can be restored to the factory settings.  
1. Touch <MENU>, located in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.08-25-ps.eps_50  
2. In the pulldown menu, touch <System Init>.  
A window like the following will appear.  
fig.08-27.eps_50  
3. Touch <OK>.  
If you want the factory settings to be in effect the next time the V-Synth GT is powered up, touch <Write> to save the  
settings.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Common (Settings Common to the Entire System)  
Master  
fig.08-02.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Master Tune  
415.3–466.2  
Hz  
Adjusts the overall tuning of the V-Synth GT. The display shows the frequency  
of the A4 note (center A).  
Master Key Shift  
Master Level  
-24– +24  
0–127  
Shifts the overall pitch of the V-Synth GT in semitone steps.  
Adjusts the volume of the entire V-Synth GT.  
Patch Remain  
(Patch Remain Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding when an-  
other patch is selected (ON), or not (OFF).  
* This function is valid only when the effect is turned off.  
Also, when this is “ON,” changes produced by incoming MIDI messages  
such as Volume (CC 7) or Pan (CC 10), as well as tonal quality and volume  
changes produced by the various controllers will be inherited.  
If you’re using AP-Synthesis, the sound will be interrupted when you switch  
patches, even if the Patch Remain Switch is ON.  
Startup Patch  
Last Patch  
Patch 001  
When the power is turned on, the V-Synth GT reinstates the patch selected at  
the time the V-Synth GT was last turned off.  
When the power is turned on, the V-Synth GT will be ready to play Patch  
“001.”  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
EQ  
fig.08-04.eps_50  
System EQ Switch  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
System EQ Switch  
Total Gain  
OFF, ON  
-15– +15 dB  
Switches the System EQ on/off.  
Adjusts the total gain.  
Low Freq (Low Frequency)  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250,  
315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,  
1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000 Hz  
Selects the frequency of the low range.  
Low Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
Adjusts the gain of the low frequency. Positive  
(+) settings will emphasize the low-frequency  
range.  
Mid 1 Freq (Mid 1 Frequency)  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250,  
315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,  
1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,  
6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000,  
20000 Hz  
Selects the frequency of the middle range 1.  
Mid 1 Gain  
Mid 1 Q  
-15– +15 dB  
Adjusts the gain of the middle range 1. Positive  
(+) settings will emphasize the middle range 1  
Adjusts the width of the middle range 1. Set a  
higher value for Q to narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
Mid 2 Freq (Mid 2 Frequency)  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250,  
315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,  
1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,  
6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000,  
20000 Hz  
Selects the frequency of the middle range 2.  
Mid 2 Gain  
Mid 2 Q  
-15– +15 dB  
Adjusts the gain of the middle range 2. Positive  
(+) settings will emphasize the middle range 2.  
Adjusts the width of the middle range 2. Set a  
higher value for Q to narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
Hi Freq (High Frequency)  
Hi Gain (High Gain)  
2000, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000,  
12500, 16000, 20000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Selects the frequency of the high range.  
Adjusts the gain of the high frequency. Positive  
(+) settings will emphasize the high-frequency  
range.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
MIDI  
fig.08-05.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Device ID (Device ID Number)  
17–32  
When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages, set this pa-  
rameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device.  
Clock Source  
INT  
The LFO frequency or Tone-FX change will synchronize to the patch tempo.  
MIDI  
The LFO frequency or Tone-FX change will synchronize to the external MIDI  
clock.  
USB MIDI  
1–16  
The LFO frequency or Tone-FX change will synchronize to the external USB  
MIDI clock.  
Specifies the MIDI receive channel.  
Receive MIDI Ch  
(Receive MIDI Channel)  
Receive Sw  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether MIDI messages will be received (ON) or not received  
(OFF).  
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Program Change  
(Receive Program Change Switch)  
Bank Select  
(Receive Bank Select Switch)  
System Ex  
(Receive System Exclusive Switch)  
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received (ON) or not (OFF).  
Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Transmit MIDI Ch  
(Transmit MIDI Channel)  
1–16, RX CH,  
OFF  
Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages.  
If you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices, turn  
this parameter “OFF.” If you want the transmit channel to always match the  
Receive MIDI Channel, set this parameter to “RX CH.”  
Program Change  
(Transmit Program Change  
Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Bank Select  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch will be transmit-  
ted as system exclusive messages (ON), or will not be transmitted (OFF).  
Specifies whether MIDI clock will be transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).  
(Transmit Bank Select Switch)  
Active Sens  
(Transmit Active Sensing Switch)  
Edit Data  
(Transmit Edit Data Switch)  
Clock Out  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
USB MIDI  
fig.08-08.eps_50  
Parameter  
USB-MIDI Thru Switch  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
Specifies whether MIDI messages received at the USB connector or MIDI IN  
connector when using MIDI via the USB connection will be retransmitted with-  
out change from the MIDI OUT connector or USB connector (ON), or will not  
be retransmitted (OFF).  
USB-MIDI Thru Switch = OFF  
USB-MIDI Thru Switch = ON  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Audio Input  
fig.08-03.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mic Sw (MIC Jack Switch)  
ON, OFF  
Specifies whether the rear panel MIC IN jack will be enabled (ON) or dis-  
abled (OFF).  
Peak  
Level  
This will light when the input volume is excessive.  
Indicates the input volume.  
Input Gain (INPUT Jack Gain)  
Input Sw (INPUT Jack Switch)  
0dB, +10dB  
ON, OFF  
Sets the gain of the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
Specifies whether the rear panel INPUT jacks will be enabled (ON) or dis-  
abled (OFF).  
Ext In Source  
ANALOG  
USB  
The MIC IN jack or INPUT jacks will be the input source.  
The USB audio from a computer connected to the V-Synth GT will be the input  
source.  
(External Input Source)  
Selects the source of external in-  
put used when Oscillator Type (p.  
95) is set to “EXT IN.”  
Ext In Type  
STEREO  
Inputs in stereo.  
(External Input Type)  
MONO-L+R  
MONO-L  
MONO-R  
Mixes the L and R input signals and inputs in monaural.  
Inputs the L signal in monaural.  
Inputs the R signal in monaural.  
Selects the type of external input  
used when Oscillator Type (p. 95)  
is set to “EXT IN.”  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Audio Output  
fig.08-06.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Output Gain  
-12– +12 dB  
This adjusts the output gain from the V-Synth GT’s Analog Out and Digital  
Out. When, for example, there are relatively few voices being sounded,  
boosting the output gain can let you attain the most suitable output level for  
recording and other purposes.  
Mix/Parallel  
MIX  
Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from the MAIN OUT  
jacks. When you want to check the final overall sound being output, set to  
MIX.  
Specifies how the sound of the en-  
tire V-Synth GT will be output.  
Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those output from the  
MAIN OUT jacks. Therefore, any sounds set with Output Assign to be  
output from the DIRECT OUT jacks is not output from the PHONES jack. Be  
sure to have any sound you want to hear through the headphones set to  
“MIX.”  
PARALLEL  
44.1, 48, 96  
kHz  
Outputs according to each Output Assign settings.  
Sets the sampling frequency of the digital output.  
Digital Output Frequency  
Sounds output from the V-Synth GT’s Digital Out are the same as those  
output from the MAIN OUT jacks.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
USB Audio  
fig.08-07.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mic Sw (MIC Jack Switch)  
ON, OFF  
Specifies whether the rear panel MIC IN jack will be enabled (ON) or dis-  
abled (OFF).  
Input Gain (Input Jack Gain)  
Input Sw (Input Jack Switch)  
0dB, +10dB  
ON, OFF  
Sets the gain of the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
Specifies whether the rear panel INPUT jacks will be enabled (ON) or dis-  
abled (OFF).  
Input Source  
(USB Audio Input Source)  
OFF, MAIN,  
ANALOG  
When the V-Synth GT is connected via USB to your computer, this specifies  
the source of the USB audio that will be output to the computer.  
Monitor Sw  
(USB Audio Input Monitor Sw)  
ON, OFF  
Specifies whether USB Audio Input Source monitoring will be sent from the  
V-Synth GT’s MAIN OUT (ON) or will not be sent (OFF).  
Output Dest  
(USB Audio Output Destination)  
OFF, MAIN,  
DIR  
When the V-Synth GT is connected via USB to your computer, this specifies  
the output destination of the USB audio that is received from the computer.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Controller (Controller-related Settings)  
Keyboard  
fig.08-11.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Keyboard Sens  
(Keyboard Sensitivity)  
Light  
Medium  
Heavy  
Sets the keyboard sensitivity to “light.”  
Sets the keyboard sensitivity to “normal.”  
Sets the keyboard sensitivity to “heavy.”  
Keyboard Velocity  
REAL, 1–127  
Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted  
when you play the keyboard. If you want actual key-  
board velocity to be transmitted, set this to “REAL.” If  
you want a fixed velocity value to be transmitted re-  
gardless of how you play, specify the desired value  
(1–127).  
Aftertouch Sens  
(Aftertouch Sensitivity)  
0–200  
Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity. Higher values will  
allow Aftertouch to be applied more easily. Normally  
you will leave this at “100.”  
Local Sw (Local Switch)  
OFF, ON  
The Local Switch determines whether the internal  
sound generator is disconnected (OFF) from the con-  
troller section (keyboard, pitch bend/modulation le-  
ver, knobs, buttons, Time Trip Pad, D Beam  
controller, pedal, and so on); or not disconnected  
(ON). Normally this is left “ON,” but if you wish to  
use the V-Synth GT’s keyboard and controllers to con-  
trol only external sound modules, set it to “OFF.”  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Time Trip Pad  
fig.08-12.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
X Assign-XY  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted by movements in the ‘X’ (horizontal) di-  
rection when the Time Trip pad is in XY mode.  
X Assign-TT (X Assign-Time Trip)  
Y Assign-XY  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted by movements in the ‘X’ (horizontal) di-  
rection when the Time Trip pad is in Time Trip mode.  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted by movements in the ‘Y’ (vertical) direc-  
tion when the Time Trip pad is in XY mode.  
Y Assign-TT (Y Assign-Time Trip)  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted by movements in the ‘Y’ (vertical) direc-  
tion when the Time Trip pad is in Time Trip mode.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
D-Beam  
fig.08-14.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Beam Sens L, R  
(D Beam Sensitivity L, R)  
0–200  
This sets the D Beam Controller’s sensitivity.  
Sens L is the left side, and Sens R is the right side. In-  
creasing this value will make the D Beam controller  
more sensitive.  
Normally you will leave this at “100.”  
1–4 Assign L, R  
(D Beam 1–4 Assign L, R)  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
CC01–31, 33–95  
Specifies the MIDI controller num-  
ber that will be transmitted by  
movements in the D Beam Control-  
ler. Assign L is the left side, and  
Assign R is the right side.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
C1/C2 Knob  
fig.08-17.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
C1, 2 Knob Assign  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted by movements in the ASSIGNABLE CON-  
TROL knob.  
S1/S2 Switch  
fig.08-19.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
S1, 2 Switch Assign  
OFF  
No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95  
(Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95)  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be  
transmitted when you press the S1 or S2 switches.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Pedal  
fig.08-18.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Hold Polarity  
(Hold Pedal Polarity)  
Standard, Reverse  
Selects the polarity of the Hold pedal. On some pedals,  
the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed  
or released is the opposite of other pedals. If your pedal  
has an effect opposite of what you expect, set this param-  
eter to “Reverse.” If you are using a Roland pedal (that  
has no polarity switch), set this parameter to “Standard.”  
Pedal 1, 2 Assign  
OFF  
The control pedal will not be used.  
Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
Pitch bend (positive direction)  
Pitch bend (negative direction)  
Aftertouch  
CC01–31, 33–95  
BEND UP  
BEND DOWN  
AFT  
This specifies the function of each  
pedal connected to the CTRL 1,  
CTRL 2 PEDAL jacks.  
VALUE INC  
The pedal will perform the same operation as pressing  
[INC/+]. This is convenient when you want to switch  
patches or tones while performing.  
VALUE DEC  
The pedal will perform the same operation as pressing  
[DEC/-]. This is convenient when you want to switch  
patches or tones while performing.  
Pedal 1, 2 Polarity  
Standard, Reverse  
Selects the polarity of the pedal. On some pedals, the  
electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or  
released is the opposite of other pedals. If your pedal has  
an effect opposite of what you expect, set this parameter  
to “Reverse.” If you are using a Roland pedal (that has no  
polarity switch), set this parameter to “Standard.”  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
V-LINK Settings  
Tx  
fig.08-20.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
V-LINK MIDI Channel  
1–16  
Specifies the channel used to transmit MIDI messages for V-LINK control.  
V-LINK Audio Sw  
(V-LINK Audio Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether sound from the externally connected video device will be  
played (ON) or not played (OFF).  
Keyboard Output Fade Sw  
(V-LINK Keyboard Output Fade  
Switch)  
Patch Palette Local Sw  
(V-LINK Patch Palette Local  
Switch)  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the video output from the video device will be stopped  
(ON) or will not be stopped (OFF) when you are not holding down a key.  
Specify whether you will press PATCH PALETTE [1]–[8] in V-LINK mode to  
switch patches (ON) or not (OFF).  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Time Trip Pad  
fig.08-21.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Time Trip Pad Local Sw  
(V-LINK Time Trip Pad Local  
Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the Time Trip pad and the internal sound generator will be  
disconnected in V-LINK mode (OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
X Assign-XY (V-LINK X Assign-XY)  
OFF  
PLAYBACK-  
SPEED  
DISSOLVE-  
TIME  
The time trip pad will not be used.  
Playback speed  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the Time Trip pad in the X (hor-  
izontal) direction in XY mode.  
Dissolve time (time over which the image switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL  
COLOR-CB  
COLOR-CR  
BRIGHTNESS  
VFX1  
Volume during audio playback  
Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
Brightness  
Visual effects 1  
Visual effects 2  
Y Assign-XY (V-LINK Y Assign-XY)  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the Time Trip pad in the Y (ver-  
tical) direction in XY mode.  
VFX2  
VFX3  
Visual effects 3  
VFX4  
Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE  
T-BAR  
Output fade  
T bar  
Assign-Time Trip  
(V-LINK Assign-Time Trip)  
OFF  
TIME-TRIP  
The time trip pad will not be used.  
Time trip  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the Time Trip pad in Time Trip  
mode.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
D Beam  
fig.08-23.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
D Beam Local Sw  
(V-LINK D Beam Local Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the D Beam controller will be disconnected from the inter-  
nal sound generator in V-LINK mode (OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
1–4 Assign L, R  
OFF  
PLAYBACK-  
SPEED  
DISSOLVE-  
TIME  
AUDIO LEVEL  
COLOR-CB  
COLOR-CR  
BRIGHTNESS  
VFX1  
The D Beam controller will not be used.  
Playback speed  
(V-LINK D Beam1–4 Assign L, R)  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the D Beam controller. Assign  
L is the left side, and Assign R is  
the right side.  
Dissolve time (time over which the image switches)  
Volume during audio playback  
Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
Brightness  
Visual effects 1  
VFX2  
Visual effects 2  
VFX3  
Visual effects 3  
VFX4  
Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE  
Output fade  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
C1/C2 Knob  
fig.08-24.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
C1, 2 Knob Local Sw  
(V-LINK Knob1, 2 Local Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specify whether the assignable controller knobs  
1 or 2 will be disconnected from the internal  
sound generator in V-LINK mode (OFF) or not  
disconnected (ON).  
C1, 2 Knob Assign  
OFF  
The assignable controller will not be used.  
Playback speed  
Dissolve time (time over which the image switch-  
es)  
Volume during audio playback  
Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
Brightness  
(V-LINK Knob1, 2 Assign)  
PLAYBACK-SPEED  
DISSOLVE-TIME  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you turn  
the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL  
knob.  
AUDIO LEVEL  
COLOR-CB  
COLOR-CR  
BRIGHTNESS  
VFX1  
Visual effects 1  
VFX2  
Visual effects 2  
VFX3  
Visual effects 3  
VFX4  
Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE  
Output fade  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Bender  
fig.08-26.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Modulation Local Sw  
(V-LINK Modulation Local Switch)  
OFF, ON  
Specifies whether the modulation lever will be disconnected from the internal  
sound generator in V-LINK mode (OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
Bender Local Sw  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF  
PLAYBACK-  
SPEED  
DISSOLVE-  
TIME  
Specifies whether the pitch bend lever will be disconnected from the internal  
sound generator in V-LINK mode (OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
Specifies whether keyboard aftertouch will be disconnected from the internal  
sound generator in V-LINK Mode (OFF) or will not be disconnected (ON).  
The modulation lever/pitch bend lever/keyboard aftertouch will not be used.  
Playback speed  
(V-LINK Pitch Bend Local Switch)  
Aftertouch Local Sw  
(V-LINK Aftertouch Local Switch)  
Modulation Assign  
(V-LINK Modulation Assign)  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the modulation lever.  
Dissolve time (time over which the image switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL  
COLOR-CB  
COLOR-CR  
BRIGHTNESS  
VFX1  
VFX2  
VFX3  
VFX4  
OUTPUT-FADE  
Volume during audio playback  
Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
Brightness  
Visual effects 1  
Visual effects 2  
Visual effects 3  
Visual effects 4  
Output fade  
Bender Assign  
(V-LINK Pitch Bend Assign)  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled when you oper-  
ate the pitch bend lever.  
Aftertouch Assign  
(V-LINK Aftertouch Assign)  
Specify the V-LINK function that  
will be controlled by keyboard af-  
tertouch.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
System Mode (Settings Common to All Modes)  
Info (Viewing Various Information)  
Version (Checking the Version)  
Here you can check the V-Synth GT’s program version.  
fig.08-30.eps_50  
Features (Checking the Functions)  
Here you can view a screen that introduces the functionality of the V-Synth GT.  
fig.08-31.eps_50  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Utility Mode  
Utility mode provides various functions for your convenience when using the V-Synth GT.  
Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen, then select and carry out the desired function.  
fig.utility-ps.eps_50  
• Project (Project-related Settings) ................................................p. 215  
• USB Storage (Exchanging Files with Your Computer)...................p. 221  
• Beep (Beep Tone Settings)........................................................p. 227  
• E1–E8 Knobs (E1–E8 knob Settings)..........................................p. 228  
• Screen Saver..........................................................................p. 229  
• Wallpaper (Changing the Wallpaper).......................................p. 230  
• Calibration (Adjusting the Controllers).......................................p. 231  
• Format (Initializing Internal Memory or USB Memory)..................p. 234  
• Factory Reset (Reset to Default Factory Settings)..........................p. 235  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
Project (Project-related Settings)  
You can load a project from USB memory into the V-Synth GT’s temporary area, or save the project that’s in the  
temporary area.  
Load Project (Loading a Project into the V-Synth GT)  
This operation will load a project from internal memory or USB memory into the V-Synth GT’s temporary area.  
When you load a project, the temporary area will be rewritten. If the temporary area contains data that you want to  
keep, store it to USB memory before you load other data.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Project>.  
The Project Menu screen appears.  
fig.09-01-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch <Load Project>.  
The Load Project screen appears.  
fig.09-02-ps.eps_50  
4. To load from internal memory, touch <Int>. To load from a USB memory, touch <USB>. Then select the project  
that you want to load.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Utility Mode  
5. Touch <OK>.  
A Warning window like the following appears.  
fig.09-03-ps.eps_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch <EXIT>.  
6. Touch <OK> to execute the operation.  
It will take several minutes for the project to be loaded.  
7. When <Completed!> is displayed, loading is finished.  
Touch <OK> to return to the Patch Play screen.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utility Mode  
Save Project (Saving a Project)  
This operation saves the project from the temporary area into internal memory or USB memory.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Project>.  
The Project Menu screen appears.  
fig.09-01-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch <Save Project>.  
The Save Project screen appears.  
fig.09-04-ps.eps_50  
4. To save to internal memory, touch <Int>. To save to USB memory, touch <USB>. Then select the save-destination  
project.  
If you want to save the data as a new project, touch <New Project>. The Project Name window will appear. Assign  
a name to the new project.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
5. Touch <OK>.  
A Warning window like the following appears.  
fig.09-05-ps.eps_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch <EXIT>.  
6. Touch <OK> to execute the operation.  
It will take several minutes for the project to be saved.  
7. When <Completed!> is displayed, saving is finished.  
Touch <OK> to return to the Patch Play screen.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utility Mode  
Convert Project (Convert a Project)  
This operation will convert (import) a V-Synth Version 2.0 or V-Synth XT project for use with your V-Synth GT.  
1. Using your computer, create a folder named “XT” on your USB memory device.  
2. Copy the V-Synth Version 2.0 or V-Synth XT project to the “XT” folder on the USB memory device, and connect it  
to the V-Synth GT’s USB MEMORY connector.  
3. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
4. Touch <Project>.  
The Project Menu screen appears.  
fig.09-01-ps.eps_50  
5. Touch <Convert Project>.  
The Convert Project screen appears.  
fig.09-07-ps.eps_50  
6. Touch the V-Synth Version 2.0 or V-Synth XT project in USB memory to select it.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
7. Touch <OK>.  
A Warning window like the following appears.  
fig.09-xxx-ps.eps_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch <EXIT>.  
8. Touch <OK> to execute the operation.  
It will take several minutes for the project to be converted.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utility Mode  
By connecting the V-Synth GT to your computer via a USB cable, you can save (back up) projects and other files such  
as individual patches, waves, and data from internal memory to the hard disk of your computer.  
Using software on your computer, you can also edit wave data you’ve created on the V-Synth GT. Conversely, wave  
data created on your computer can be used by the V-Synth GT.  
Never turn off the power or disconnect or reconnect the USB cable while using the USB Storage function to transfer  
data.  
As appropriate for the computer you’re using, please read “Windows Users” (p. 221) or “Mac Users” (p. 223).  
Windows Users  
Connecting the V-Synth GT to Your Computer  
1. Make sure that the power of the V-Synth GT is turned off.  
2. Start up your computer.  
3. Connect the V-Synth GT and your computer using a USB cable.  
fig.09-10_j.eps  
USB  
Connector  
USB Cable  
Computer  
4. Turn on the power of V-Synth GT.  
V-Synth GT  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Utility Mode  
5. Touch <USB Storage> in the Utility Menu screen.  
The USB Storage screen appears.  
fig.09-11-ps.eps_50  
6. Touch <Mount the Internal Memory> to establish the connection with your computer.  
7. When the USB connection is established, the driver installation will begin. A dialog box of “Found new  
hardware” will appear near the Windows task tray.  
Installation is completely automatic. Please wait for it to be completed.  
8. When installation is completed, open My Computer and you will see a new drive icon.  
9. Once the V-Synth GT is connected, you can transfer files by operating your computer.  
Disconnecting USB Storage  
1. Use the device eject button shown in the taskbar at the lower right of your computer screen to cancel the  
connection with the V-Synth GT.  
2. Press [EXIT].  
The USB storage will be disconnected.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Utility Mode  
Mac Users  
Connecting the V-Synth GT to Your Computer  
1. Make sure that the power of the V-Synth GT is turned off.  
2. Start up your computer.  
3. Connect the V-Synth GT and your computer using a USB cable.  
fig.09-15_j.eps_50  
USB  
Connector  
USB Cable  
Computer  
V-Synth GT  
4. Turn on the power of V-Synth GT.  
5. Touch <USB Storage> in the Utility Menu screen.  
The USB Storage screen appears.  
fig.09-11-ps.eps_50  
6. Touch <Mount the Internal Memory> to establish the connection with your computer.  
7. When the USB connection is established, a new drive icon will appear on your desktop.  
8. Once the V-Synth GT is connected, you can transfer files by operating your computer.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
Disconnecting USB Storage  
1. Select the V-Synth GT drive icon on the desktop, and drag it into the “trash.”  
Alternatively, select “Eject “V-SYNTH GT”” from the “Files” menu.  
2. Press [EXIT].  
The USB storage will be disconnected.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Utility Mode  
Examples of Using Storage Function  
When using USB in Storage function, the data within the V-Synth GT may be damaged if you operate your computer  
backup as described below.  
Backing Up the V-Synth GT’s Internal Data onto Your Computer  
1. Use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth GT to your computer as described in “Connecting the V-Synth GT to your  
computer” (p. 221, p. 223).  
2. Using your computer, copy the V-Synth GT’s files and folders onto a drive (e.g., hard disk) of your computer.  
3. Cancel the USB connection (p. 222, p. 224).  
Loading Backup Data from Your Computer into the V-Synth GT  
1. Use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth GT to your computer as described in “Connecting the V-Synth GT to your  
computer” (p. 221, p. 223).  
2. Using your computer, copy the files and folders that you previously saved on your computer to the V-Synth GT.  
3. Cancel the USB connection (p. 222, p. 224).  
Note when connecting the V-Synth GT to your computer  
Do not format, optimize, or execute the scan disk command on the V-Synth GT’s user memory from your computer.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Utility Mode  
The V-Synth GT’s File Structure  
As seen from your computer, the V-Synth GT’s file structure is as follows.  
Do not perform operations on your computer to erase (format) or rename these folders or files.  
If the V-Synth GT stops operating correctly, break the USB connection between the computer and the V-Synth GT (p.  
222, p. 224), and then execute the Factory Reset command (p. 235).  
This will erase all the data that has been saved on the V-Synth GT. As a precaution against such occurrences, we  
recommend that you always make a backup of your data (p. 225).  
Internal Memory  
USB Memory  
fig.09-20.eps  
fig.09-21.eps  
[USB Memory]  
[V-SYNTH GT]  
[Internal.prj]  
[Project1.prj]  
V-Synth GT System.s00  
V-Synth GT Template.s00  
V-Synth GT Palette.s00  
V-Synth GT Setup.s00  
V-Synth GT MicSetting.s00  
V-Synth GT System.s00  
V-Synth GT Template.s00  
V-Synth GT Palette.s00  
V-Synth GT Setup.s00  
V-Synth GT MicSetting.s00  
[Patch]  
[Patch]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
:
512 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
[Tone]  
:
512 xxxxxxxxxxxx.d00  
[Tone]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
:
896 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
[Wave]  
:
896 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
[Wave]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.w00  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.w00  
:
:
999 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
999 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
[Panel]  
[Panel]  
image001.img  
image002.img  
image001.img  
image002.img  
:
:
image016.img  
image016.img  
[Project2.prj]  
[Project3.prj]  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
Beep (Beep Tone Settings)  
You can specify whether a “beep” will be heard when you touch a valid point in the touch panel.  
* With the factory settings, there will be a beep tone.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Beep>.  
The beep tone will be switched on/off.  
fig.09-35-ps.eps_50  
fig.09-36-ps.eps_50  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
E1–E8 Knobs (E1–E8 knob Settings)  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <E1–E8 knobs>.  
The E1–E8 Knob Settings screen appears.  
3. Specify the parameters you wish to assign to the E1–E8 knobs.  
fig.09-37-ps.eps_50  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Init Settings Sw  
E1–E8 Assign  
Initializes the settings of the E1–E8 knobs.  
Specify the parameters assigned to the E1–E8 knobs.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
Screen Saver  
This feature allows you to have a simple animation be displayed whenever the V-Synth GT has not been operated for  
a certain period of time.  
Because of the characteristics of the TFT liquid crystal display used in the V-Synth GT, leaving the same screen displayed  
for an extended time may cause that image to be burned into the screen. To avoid this, we recommend that you use  
the screen saver.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Screen Saver>.  
The Screen Saver screen appears.  
fig.09-45-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch the desired screen saver image to select it.  
You can touch <Preview> to get a look at the screen saver image at the size of the actual screen.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Screen Saver Time  
OFF,  
1– 60 min  
Sets the time (minutes) until the screen saver begins working.  
If this is OFF, the screen saver will not appear.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
Wallpaper (Changing the Wallpaper)  
You can change the background image of the touch panel.  
Via USB memory, you can also use data such as a photo you’ve taken as the background image.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Wallpaper>.  
The Wallpaper screen appears.  
fig.09-40-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch the image that you want to use as the background.  
The selected image will appear in the background.  
Import (Importing an Image as Wallpaper)  
You can import a BMP file via USB memory and use it as wallpaper for the V-Synth GT.  
1. Copy the bitmap file that you want to use as wallpaper (Windows BMP format, 24-bit, 320 x 240 pixels) to your  
USB memory (the root level), and connect the USB memory to the V-Synth GT’s USB MEMORY connector.  
2. Touch <Import> in the Wallpaper screen.  
3. Touch the bitmap file in USB memory to select it.  
4. Touch <OK>.  
The V-Synth GT provides sixteen screens that you can use as wallpaper. The imported file will be overwritten over the  
currently selected screen.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
Calibration (Adjusting the Controllers)  
Adjusting the Positional Accuracy of the Touch Panel  
Perform this adjustment if the touch panel no longer responds as you expect.  
1. In the Utility Menu screen, touch <Calibration>.  
The Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-30-ps.eps_50  
2. Touch <Touch Screen>.  
The Touch Screen Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-31-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch the center of “+” symbol indicated by the square symbol in the screen, in the following order: left top →  
right bottom.  
When you have touched all four points, the screen will close, and the sensitivity of the touch screen will be  
calibrated.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
Adjusting the Positional Accuracy of the Time Trip Pad  
Perform this adjustment if the Time Trip pad no longer responds as you expect.  
1. In the Utility Menu screen, touch <Calibration>.  
The Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-30-ps.eps_50  
2. Touch <Time Trip Pad>.  
The TT Pad Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-32-ps.eps_50  
3. On the Time Trip pad, touch the points indicated by the square symbol in the screen, in the following order: left  
top right bottom.  
When you have touched all four points, the screen will close, and the sensitivity of the Time Trip pad will be  
calibrated.  
fig.09-38.eps_50  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility Mode  
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller  
Perform this adjustment if the D Beam controller is functioning incorrectly, such as responding even though you have  
not operated it.  
1. In the Utility Menu screen, touch <Calibration>.  
The Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-30-ps.eps_50  
2. Touch <D Beam>.  
The D Beam Calibration screen appears.  
fig.09-33-ps.eps_50, fig.09-39.eps  
When you place your hand over the D Beam controller, the “L” or “R” level meter in the screen will move upward  
or downward.  
3. First specify the location at which the D Beam controller will begin responding (i.e., the minimum value).  
Move your hand toward the D Beam controller, and touch <Min> at the point where you want the controller to  
begin responding.  
4. Next specify the location at which the D Beam controller will reach the peak (i.e., the maximum value).  
Continue moving your hand toward the D Beam controller, and touch <Max> at the point where you want the  
peak response to occur.  
5. While watching the level meter in the screen, raise and lower your hand to check the response of the D Beam  
controller.  
6. If you are satisfied with the response, touch <OK>.  
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will be calibrated.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Utility Mode  
Format (Initializing Internal Memory or USB Memory)  
You can initialize (format) internal memory or USB memory to erase all data.  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Format>.  
The Format screen appears.  
fig.09-50-ps.eps_50  
3. If you want to format the internal memory, touch <Internal Memory>.  
If you want to format a USB memory, touch <USB Memory>.  
4. When you format a USB memory, the Volume Name window will appear, allowing you to assign a new volume  
name.  
5. Touch <OK>.  
A Warning window like the following appears.  
fig.09-51-ps.eps_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch <EXIT>.  
6. Touch <OK> to execute the operation.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Utility Mode  
Factory Reset (Reset to Default Factory Settings  
)
This restores all data in the V-Synth GT to the factory-set condition (Factory Reset).  
If there is important data you’ve created that’s stored in the V-Synth GT’s internal memory, all such data is discarded  
when a Factory Reset is performed. If you want to keep the existing data, save it on a USB memory (p. 217) or USB  
backing up onto a computer (p. 221).  
1. Press [UTILITY] to access the Utility Menu screen.  
2. Touch <Factory Reset>.  
The Factory Reset screen appears.  
fig.09-55-ps.eps_50  
3. Touch <Execute> to execute the Factory Reset.  
It will take several minutes for the factory reset to be carried out.  
4. When <Completed!> is displayed, the factory reset is finished.  
Touch <OK> to return to the Patch Play screen.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Synthesizer Keyboard  
Date: April 1, 2007  
Version: 1.00  
Model: V-Synth GT  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Function...  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Basic  
Channel Changed  
Default  
1–16  
1–16  
1–16  
1–16  
Memorized  
Default  
Messages  
Altered  
Mode 3  
Mono, Poly  
**************  
Mode 3  
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1)  
* 2  
Mode  
Note  
Number :  
0–127  
**************  
0–127  
0–127  
True Voice  
Note On  
Note Off  
O
O
O
O
Velocity  
After  
Touch  
Key’s  
Channel’s  
X
O
O
O
*1  
*1  
Pitch Bend  
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
*1  
0, 32  
*1  
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*5  
Bank select  
Modulation  
Breath type  
Foot type  
Portamento time  
Data entry  
Panpot  
1
(Modulation)  
(Knob 1)  
2
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
4
(Pedal 2)  
5
6, 38  
X
X
10  
11  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
(Pedal 1)  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Expression  
Effect control 1  
Effect control 2  
General purpose controller 1  
General purpose controller 2  
General purpose controller 3  
General purpose controller 4  
Breath type  
General purpose controller 1  
General purpose controller 2  
General purpose controller 3  
General purpose controller 4  
Hold 1  
Control  
Change  
12  
(Switch 1)  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
13  
(Switch 2)  
16  
(D Beam1-L)  
(D Beam2-L)  
(D Beam3-L)  
(D Beam4-L)  
(Knob 2)  
17  
18  
19  
34  
48  
(D Beam1-R)  
(D Beam2-R)  
(D Beam3-R)  
(D Beam4-R)  
(Hold)  
49  
50  
51  
64  
65  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*5  
*5  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Portamento  
Sostenuto  
66  
X
80  
O
O
O
O
X
(TT Pad XY-X)  
(TT Pad XY-Y)  
(TT Pad TT-X)  
(TT Pad TT-Y)  
General purpose controller 5  
General purpose controller 6  
General purpose controller 7  
General purpose controller 8  
General purpose effects 1  
General purpose effects 3  
Pedal, Knob, D Beam, TT Pad, Switch  
RPN LSB, MSB  
81  
82  
83  
91  
O
O
X
(Reverb)  
(Chorus)  
93  
X
O
X
1–31, 64–95  
100, 101  
*1  
O
Program  
Change  
O
*1  
*3  
O
0–127  
*1  
*1  
**************  
: True Number  
Program No. 1–128  
System Exclusive  
O
O
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune Request  
X
X
X
X
X
X
System  
Common  
System  
Realtime : Commands  
: Clock  
X
X
*1  
*1  
X
O
*1  
*4  
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
: All Sound Off  
: Reset All Controllers  
: Local On/Off  
: All Notes Off  
: Active Sensing  
: System Reset  
O
Aux  
Messages  
X
O (123–127)  
O
X
* 1 O X is selectable  
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M1.  
Notes  
* 3 Transmitted when the Transmit Edit Switch is ON, or when RQ1 is received.  
* 4 Recognized when “Sampling Trigger” is “MIDI.”  
* 5 Not received for AP-Synthesis  
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO  
O : Yes  
X : No  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
V-Synth GT: Synthesizer Keyboard  
Keyboard  
Arpeggiator  
61 keys (with velocity and channel aftertouch)  
Patterns: User programmable (supports use of control change  
messages)  
Motifs: 8 types  
Tempo: 20–250 BPM  
Sound Generator Configuration  
Dual-core (2 Tones per Patch: Upper, Lower)  
Sections per Tone:  
Oscillator (envelope x 4 + LFO x 1) x 2  
Modulator x 1  
MIDI Parts  
1
COSM (envelope x 2 + LFO x 1) x 2  
TVA (envelope x 1 + LFO x 1) x 1  
Multi Step Modulator x 1  
Maximum Polyphony  
28 voices (varies according to the sound generator load)  
Tone-FX x 1  
Internal Memory  
Project: 1  
AP-Synthesis (Articulative Phrase Synthesis) x 1 (*)  
Vocal Designer x 1 (*)  
* Usable on either upper or lower (not both)  
Patches: 512  
Tones: 896  
Wave Memory (RAM): 64 MB  
OSC1/OSC2 (Oscillator 1, 2)  
Analog Modeling: 14 waveforms  
Internal Storage  
(SAW, SQUARE, TRIANGLE, SINE, RAMP, JUNO,  
HQ-SAW, HQ-SQUARE, NOISE, LA-SAW, LA-SQUARE,  
SUPER-SAW, FEEDBACK-OSC, XMOD-OSC)  
PCM/VariPhrase (Preset waveforms + Sampling waveforms)  
External Input  
Internal Flash Memory: 49.5 MB  
External Storage Device  
USB Flash Memory  
Effects  
Tone-FX: 41 types  
Chorus: 8 types  
MOD (Modulator)  
4 types (RING, FM, ENV-RING, OSC-SYNC)  
Reverb: 13 types  
4-band system EQ  
Input Effects (Mic/Sampling)  
COSM  
16 types  
(OD/DS, W-SHAPE, AMP, SPEAKER, RESONATOR,  
SBF1, SBF2, COMB, DUAL, TVF, DYN-TVF, COMP,  
LIMITER, F-SHIFT, LO-FI, TB FILTER)  
Sampling Frequency  
Internal: 44.1 kHz  
DIGITAL IN/OUT: 96, 48, 44.1 kHz  
Multi Step Modulator  
Signal Processing  
Provided independently for the Upper Tone and Lower Tone  
Tracks per tone: 4  
Internal Processing  
Sound Generating Section: 32 bits (floating point)  
Effects Section: 32 bits (fixed point)  
DA Conversion: 24 bits  
Maximum number of step: 16  
Tempo: 20–250 BPM  
AP-Synthesis  
AD Conversion: 24 bits  
Source Waveforms: 38 types  
Phrase Models: Violin, Erhu, Sax, Flute, Multifade  
Nominal Output Level  
MAIN OUT: +4 dBu  
DIRECT OUT: +4 dBu  
Vocal Designer  
Carrier: Oscillator x 2, Modulator x 1, COSM x 2, TVA x 1,  
Multi Step Modulator x 1  
Vocoder: 4 types (Stereo, Mono, Vintage, Enhance)  
Formant: 7 types (Maximum)  
Nominal Input Level  
INPUT (L, R): -10/-20 dBu  
MIC IN: -50– -10 dBu  
Display  
Zones  
320 x 240 dots backlit TFT full color touch screen  
Upper Tone: 16  
Lower Tone: 16  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Connectors  
Headphone Jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)  
Main Output Jacks (L/MONO, R) (1/4 inch TRS phone type)  
Direct Output Jacks (L, R) (1/4 inch phone type)  
Input Jacks (L, R) (1/4 inch phone type)  
Mic Jack (1/4 inch phone type/XLR type, phantom power)  
Hold pedal Jack  
Control pedal Jacks (1, 2)  
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT, THRU)  
USB Connectors  
COMPUTER (supports USB 2.0 file transfer, USB 1.1 USB  
MIDI, and USB Audio)  
MEMORY (supports USB 2.0 Flash Memory)  
Digital Audio Interface (24-bit, IEC60958)  
COAXIAL (IN, OUT)  
OPTICAL (IN, OUT)  
AC Inlet  
Power Supply  
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V  
(50/60 Hz)  
Power Consumption  
30 W  
Dimensions  
1066 (W) x 411 (D) x 125 (H) mm  
42 (W) x 16-3/16 (D) x 4-15/16 (H) inches  
Weight  
13.8 kg  
30 lbs 7 oz  
Accessories  
Owner’s Manual  
Quick Start  
Driver Installation Guide  
CD-ROM (USB Driver)  
Power Cord  
Options  
Keyboard Stand: KS-12  
Pedal Switch: DP series  
Footswitch: BOSS FS-5U  
Expression Pedal: EV-5  
USB Memory: M-UF128  
Microphone: DR series  
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)  
962a  
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or  
appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbols  
Octave Range ..................................................................... 70  
Arpeggio Pattern ........................................................................ 71  
Vocal Designer .......................................................... 156–157  
A
Pan .................................................................................. 125  
Phrase Model ................................................................... 125  
Pitch ................................................................................ 126  
Pizzicato .......................................................................... 138  
Portamento ....................................................................... 137  
Sax ......................................................................... 129, 134  
Tremolo ............................................................................ 138  
Violin ............................................................... 127, 132, 138  
Waveform ........................................................................ 125  
Arabian Scale ........................................................................... 94  
Bank Select .............................................................................. 198  
Beam Sens L, R ........................................................................ 205  
Beat Keep Sw ............................................................................ 99  
C
C1, 2 Knob  
Local Sw ........................................................................... 211  
C1, 2 Knob Assign ................................................................... 206  
V-LINK .............................................................................. 211  
CALC ...................................................................................... 186  
Calibration  
D Beam ............................................................................ 233  
Time Trip Pad .................................................................... 232  
Touch Panel ...................................................................... 231  
Arpeggiator .............................................................................. 51  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Category  
Dynamics  
Chorus ..................................................................................... 78  
Clock Out ............................................................................... 198  
Compressor  
Vocal Designer ................................................................. 154  
COMPUTER  
Connecting  
Convert  
System Mode .................................................................... 197  
Vocal Designer .................................................................. 152  
Project ............................................................................. 219  
COSM Type ............................................................................ 117  
Ext In Source ............................................................................ 200  
F
D
1–4 Assign L, R ................................................................. 205  
File Structure ............................................................................ 226  
Fine Tune .................................................................. 97, 100, 102  
Decay  
Decay Time  
Delay Time  
AP-Synthesis ...................................................................... 126  
Flute ............................................................................... 130, 135  
LFO ................................................................................. 122  
[DETUNE] ................................................................................. 23  
FOOT PEDAL Jacks ..................................................................... 24  
Formant Keyfollow .................................................................... 112  
Formant Type ........................................................................... 156  
Format .................................................................................... 234  
Frequency Modulator ................................................................ 115  
Front Panel ................................................................................ 20  
Detune .............................................................................. 97, 105  
Detune Keyfollow ..................................................................... 105  
Detune LFO Depth .................................................................... 105  
Device ID ................................................................................ 198  
DIGITAL AUDIO Connectors ........................................................ 24  
Digital Output Freq .................................................................. 201  
DIRECT OUT Jacks ..................................................................... 25  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H
Harmonics LFO Depth ............................................................... 108  
Headphones ............................................................................. 25  
[HOLD]  
Level Keyfollow ........................................................................ 113  
Hold  
Arpeggio ..................................................................... 51, 69  
I
Initializing  
Patch ................................................................................. 62  
System Settings ................................................................. 195  
Input Source .................................................................... 174, 202  
Aftertouch ......................................................................... 212  
C1, 2 Knob ....................................................................... 211  
Lower Pan ................................................................................. 65  
K
Key Sync  
Matrix Control ........................................................................... 91  
MEMORY  
LFO ................................................................................. 122  
Keyboard  
Sensitivity ......................................................................... 203  
Split ................................................................................... 88  
Transpose (in Octave Units) .................................................. 45  
Transpose (in Semitone Steps) ............................................... 44  
Velocity .............................................................................. 43  
Keyboard Output Fade Sw ........................................................ 208  
Keyboard Sens ........................................................................ 203  
Keyboard Velocity ............................................................. 70, 203  
Keyword  
Memory  
USB ................................................................................... 31  
Metronome .............................................................................. 176  
MIC IN Jack .............................................................................. 25  
Mic Settings  
Patch ................................................................................. 41  
Tone .................................................................................. 57  
Vocal Designer .................................................................. 151  
Mic Sw ........................................................................... 200, 202  
MIDI ....................................................................................... 198  
USB ................................................................................. 199  
MIDI Channel .......................................................................... 198  
V-LINK .............................................................................. 208  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Local Sw .......................................................................... 212  
Modulation Assign ................................................................... 212  
Modulation Lever ....................................................................... 43  
Modulator Type ....................................................................... 115  
Multi Step Modulator ........................................................ 142, 144  
N
Name  
Patch ................................................................................. 59  
Sample ............................................................................ 168  
Noise Suppressor  
Vocal Designer ................................................................. 153  
Numeric Keys ............................................................................ 34  
O
Offset  
ON/OFF  
Operation  
AP-Synthesis ...................................................................... 126  
Entire System ..................................................................... 196  
Patch .................................................................................. 65  
Pitch Bend ................................................................................. 43  
Pitch Bend Lever ......................................................................... 43  
Pitch Bend Range ....................................................................... 90  
Pitch Keyfollow ......................................................................... 102  
Pitch LFO Depth ........................................................................ 102  
Pizzicato ................................................................................. 138  
Polyphony ................................................................................. 27  
Touch Panel ........................................................................ 33  
OPTICAL IN/ OUT ..................................................................... 24  
Original Fine Tune ................................................................... 192  
Original Pitch .......................................................................... 192  
Original Tempo ....................................................................... 186  
OSC1/2 ................................................................................... 29  
Oscillator Sync ........................................................................ 116  
Output Dest ............................................................................. 202  
Output Gain ............................................................................ 201  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Move .......................................................................... 170  
Project .............................................................................. 217  
Tone ................................................................................... 81  
Power  
PREVIEW ................................................................................ 180  
Pro Edit ..................................................................................... 85  
Project .............................................................................. 31, 215  
Pulse Width Keyfollow .............................................................. 103  
R
Rate  
Release  
MOD ............................................................................... 116  
Release Time  
Flute ................................................................................ 130  
Multifade .......................................................................... 131  
Sax ................................................................................. 129  
Sound Generator Section ............................................................ 26  
SS Detune LFO Depth ................................................................ 106  
Startup Patch ........................................................................... 196  
Reset  
STRUCTURE Buttons .................................................................... 23  
Sub Level ................................................................................... 97  
Sub OSC Octave Select .............................................................. 97  
Sub-Oscillator ............................................................................ 98  
Sustain  
TVA ................................................................................. 121  
Sustain Level  
TVA ................................................................................. 121  
Synchronize ............................................................................. 198  
Synchronizing  
S
S1, 2 Switch Assign ................................................................. 206  
S1/S2 Switch ............................................................................ 67  
Sample  
Editing .............................................................. 178, 182–183  
Encode ............................................................................ 187  
Saving ............................................................................. 191  
Sample Copy .......................................................................... 169  
Sample Delete ......................................................................... 172  
Sample Exchange .................................................................... 171  
Music and Video ................................................................. 52  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
System Menu ........................................................................... 194  
System Settings  
Transpose .................................................................................. 44  
Trigger Level ............................................................................ 174  
T
Template  
Sampling ................................................................... 163–164  
Tempo  
U
USB Audio .............................................................................. 202  
USB Connectors ......................................................................... 24  
[TIME TRIP]  
Time trip pad ...................................................................... 20  
Tone  
Tone Coarse Tune ...................................................................... 94  
Tone List ................................................................................... 57  
Tone Menu ................................................................................ 81  
Tone Name ............................................................................... 82  
Tone Write ................................................................................ 81  
Tone-FX ................................................................................... 141  
Touch Panel  
1–4 Assign L, R ................................................................. 210  
C1, 2 Knob Assign ............................................................ 211  
D Beam ............................................................................ 210  
Functions ............................................................................ 53  
Settings ............................................................................ 208  
Time Trip Pad .................................................................... 209  
X Assign-XY ....................................................................... 209  
Y Assign-XY ....................................................................... 209  
V-LINK Audio Sw ...................................................................... 208  
Calibration ....................................................................... 231  
Icons .................................................................................. 36  
Operation .......................................................................... 33  
Touch Screen ........................................................................ 33–34  
V-LINK MIDI Channel ................................................................ 208  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Vocal Designer ........................................................................ 146  
Compressor ...................................................................... 154  
EQ (Equalizer) .................................................................. 152  
Settings ............................................................................ 150  
W
Wave Gain ................................................................. 97, 99, 101  
Waveform  
Analog Oscillator ................................................................ 96  
Writing  
System Settings ................................................................. 194  
Tone .................................................................................. 81  
X
V-LINK ............................................................................. 209  
X-Mod .................................................................................... 110  
Y
Y Assign-TT ............................................................................. 204  
Y Assign-XY ............................................................................. 204  
V-LINK ............................................................................. 209  
Z
ZeroX (Zero Cross Search) ........................................................ 181  
Zoom ..................................................................................... 181  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For EU Countries  
SE  
FI  
UK  
DE  
HU  
PL  
FR  
IT  
CZ  
SK  
ES  
PT  
NL  
EE  
LT  
LV  
SI  
DK  
NO  
GR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the USA  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Compliance Information Statement  
Model Name : V-Synth GT  
Type of Equipment : Synthesizer Keyboard  
Responsible Party : Roland Corporation U.S.  
Address : 5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938  
Telephone : (323) 890-3700  
For EU Countries  
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.  
For the USA  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION  
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee  
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.  
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.  
For Canada  
NOTICE  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.  
AVIS  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland  
distributor in your country as shown below.  
PHILIPPINES  
CURACAO  
URUGUAY  
NORWAY  
JORDAN  
AFRICA  
EGYPT  
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.  
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue  
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,  
PHILIPPINES  
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.  
Orionweg 30  
Todo Musica S.A.  
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa  
1771  
Roland Scandinavia Avd.  
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.  
Kontor Norge  
FREDDY FOR MUSIC  
P. O. Box 922846  
Amman 11192 JORDAN  
TEL: (06) 5692696  
Curacao, Netherland Antilles  
TEL:(305)5926866  
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95  
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo  
NORWAY  
Al Fanny Trading Office  
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany  
Street,  
C.P.: 11.800  
Montevideo, URUGUAY  
TEL: (02) 924-2335  
TEL: (02) 899 9801  
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC  
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez  
Calle Proyecto Central No.3  
Ens.La Esperilla  
Santo Domingo,  
Dominican Republic  
TEL:(809) 683 0305  
TEL: 2273 0074  
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,  
Cairo 11341, EGYPT  
TEL: 20-2-417-1828  
SINGAPORE  
SWEE LEE MUSIC  
COMPANY PTE. LTD.  
150 Sims Drive,  
SINGAPORE 387381  
TEL: 6846-3676  
KUWAIT  
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI  
& SONS CO.  
Abdullah Salem Street,  
Safat, KUWAIT  
TEL: 243-6399  
VENEZUELA  
Instrumentos Musicales  
Allegro,C.A.  
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar  
POLAND  
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.  
UL. Gibraltarska 4.  
PL-03 664 Warszawa  
POLAND  
REUNION  
Maison FO - YAM Marcel  
25 Rue Jules Hermann,  
Chaudron - BP79 97 491  
Ste Clotilde Cedex,  
import  
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo  
Caracas, Venezuela  
TEL: (212) 244-1122  
TEL: (022) 679 4419  
ECUADOR  
Mas Musika  
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma  
Guayaquil - Ecuador  
TAIWAN  
ROLAND TAIWAN  
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.  
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung  
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,  
TAIWAN, R.O.C.  
LEBANON  
Chahine S.A.L.  
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine  
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-  
5857  
Beirut, LEBANON  
TEL: (01) 20-1441  
PORTUGAL  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Portugal Office  
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto  
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL  
TEL: 22 608 00 60  
REUNION ISLAND  
TEL: (0262) 218-429  
TEL:(593-4)2302364  
SOUTH AFRICA  
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music  
(Pty)Ltd.  
2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER  
JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195,  
SOUTH AFRICA  
TEL: (011)417 3400  
FAX: (011)417 3462  
EUROPE  
EL SALVADOR  
OMNI MUSIC  
75 Avenida Norte y Final  
Alameda Juan Pablo II,  
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,  
EL SALVADOR  
TEL: (02) 2561 3339  
AUSTRIA  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
ROMANIA  
FBS LINES  
Piata Libertatii 1,  
535500 Gheorgheni,  
ROMANIA  
OMAN  
THAILAND  
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.  
Malatan House No.1  
Al Noor Street, Ruwi  
SULTANATE OF OMAN  
TEL: 2478 3443  
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.  
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,  
New Road, Sumpantawongse,  
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND  
TEL: (02) 224-8821  
Austrian Office  
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,  
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA  
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260  
TEL: 262-0788  
TEL: (266) 364 609  
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.  
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24  
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800  
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA  
TEL: (021) 799 4900  
GUATEMALA  
BELGIUM/FRANCE/  
HOLLAND/  
LUXEMBOURG  
Roland Central Europe N.V.  
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel  
(Westerlo) BELGIUM  
RUSSIA  
MuTek  
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6  
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA  
TEL: (095) 981-4967  
QATAR  
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &  
Stores)  
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR  
Casa Instrumental  
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11  
Ciudad de Guatemala  
Guatemala  
AUSTRALIA/  
NEW ZEALAND  
TEL:(502) 599-2888  
TEL: 4423-554  
HONDURAS  
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.  
BO.Paz Barahona  
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O  
San Pedro Sula, Honduras  
TEL: (504) 553-2029  
SLOVAKIA  
AUSTRALIA/  
NEW ZEALAND  
Roland Corporation  
Australia Pty.,Ltd.  
38 Campbell Avenue  
Dee Why West. NSW 2099  
AUSTRALIA  
SAUDI ARABIA  
aDawliah Universal  
Electronics APL  
Corniche Road, Aldossary  
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,  
SAUDI ARABIA  
ASIA  
TEL: (014) 575811  
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.  
Povazská 18.  
CHINA  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road  
Shanghai 200090, CHINA  
TEL: (021) 5580-0800  
CROATIA  
ART-CENTAR  
Degenova 3.  
HR - 10000 Zagreb  
TEL: (1) 466 8493  
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky  
TEL: (035) 6424 330  
SPAIN  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Paseo García Faria, 33-35  
08005 Barcelona SPAIN  
TEL: 93 493 91 00  
MARTINIQUE  
Musique & Son  
Z.I.Les Mangle  
97232 Le Lamantin  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 426860  
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952  
SAUDI ARABIA  
TEL: (03) 898 2081  
CZECH REP.  
CZECH REPUBLIC  
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o  
Voctárova 247/16  
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,  
CZECH REP.  
For Australia  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
(BEIJING OFFICE)  
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili  
Chaoyang District Beijing  
100011 CHINA  
Tel: (02) 9982 8266  
For New Zealand  
Tel: (09) 3098 715  
SYRIA  
Technical Light & Sound  
Center  
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.  
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,  
Damascus, SYRIA  
SWEDEN  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE  
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.  
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN  
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20  
Gigamusic SARL  
10 Rte De La Folie  
97200 Fort De France  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 715222  
TEL: (2) 830 20270  
CENTRAL/LATIN  
AMERICA  
TEL: (010) 6426-5050  
DENMARK  
TEL: (011) 223-5384  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,  
DK-2100 Copenhagen  
DENMARK  
HONG KONG  
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.  
Service Division  
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen  
Wan, New Territories,  
HONG KONG  
SWITZERLAND  
Roland (Switzerland) AG  
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,  
CH-4452 Itingen,  
SWITZERLAND  
TEL: (061) 927-8383  
ARGENTINA  
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.  
Av.Santa Fe 2055  
(1123) Buenos Aires  
ARGENTINA  
TEL: (011) 4508-2700  
TURKEY  
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.  
Galip Dede Cad. No.37  
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY  
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10  
MEXICO  
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.  
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar  
de los Padres 01780 Mexico  
D.F. MEXICO  
TEL: 3916 6200  
FINLAND  
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial  
Finland  
Elannontie 5  
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND  
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020  
TEL: 2415 0911  
TEL: (55) 5668-6699  
U.A.E.  
Zak Electronics & Musical  
Instruments Co. L.L.C.  
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,  
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,  
U.A.E.  
UKRAINE  
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.  
P.O.Box: 37-a.  
Nedecey Str. 30  
UA - 89600 Mukachevo,  
UKRAINE  
Parsons Music Ltd.  
BARBADOS  
NICARAGUA  
Bansbach Instrumentos  
Musicales Nicaragua  
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal  
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida  
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503  
Managua, Nicaragua  
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39  
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,  
Kowloon, HONG KONG  
TEL: 2333 1863  
A&B Music Supplies LTD  
12 Webster Industrial Park  
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados  
TEL: (246)430-1100  
GERMANY  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
Oststrasse 96, 22844  
Norderstedt, GERMANY  
TEL: (040) 52 60090  
TEL: (04) 3360715  
TEL: (03131) 414-40  
INDIA  
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.  
409, Nirman Kendra  
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound  
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,  
Mumbai-400011, INDIA  
TEL: (022) 2493 9051  
BRAZIL  
Roland Brasil Ltda.  
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B  
Parque Industrial San Jose  
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL  
TEL: (011) 4615 5666  
UNITED KINGDOM  
TEL: (505)277-2557  
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.  
Atlantic Close, Swansea  
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA  
SA7 9FJ,  
NORTH AMERICA  
PANAMA  
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.  
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,  
Panama City, REP. DE  
PANAMA  
GREECE/CYPRUS  
STOLLAS S.A.  
Music Sound Light  
155, New National Road  
Patras 26442, GREECE  
TEL: 2610 435400  
CANADA  
Roland Canada Ltd.  
(Head Office)  
5480 Parkwood Way  
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4  
CANADA  
UNITED KINGDOM  
TEL: (01792) 702701  
CHILE  
Comercial Fancy II S.A.  
Rut.: 96.919.420-1  
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor  
Santiago - Centro, CHILE  
TEL: (02) 688-9540  
INDONESIA  
PT Citra IntiRama  
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150  
Jakarta Pusat  
INDONESIA  
TEL: (021) 6324170  
TEL: 315-0101  
PARAGUAY  
Distribuidora De  
Instrumentos Musicales  
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira  
Asuncion PARAGUAY  
TEL: (595) 21 492147  
MIDDLE EAST  
BAHRAIN  
TEL: (604) 270 6626  
HUNGARY  
Roland East Europe Ltd.  
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83  
H-2046 Torokbalint,  
HUNGARY  
COLOMBIA  
Centro Musical Ltda.  
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9  
Medellin, Colombia  
Roland Canada Ltd.  
(Toronto Office)  
170 Admiral Boulevard  
Mississauga On L5T 2N6  
CANADA  
KOREA  
Moon Stores  
Cosmos Corporation  
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,  
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA  
TEL: (02) 3486-8855  
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,  
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,  
State of BAHRAIN  
TEL: (23) 511011  
PERU  
Audionet  
Distribuciones Musicales SAC  
Juan Fanning 530  
Miraflores  
TEL: (574)3812529  
TEL: 17 211 005  
TEL: (905) 362 9707  
IRELAND  
Roland Ireland  
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount  
Avenue, Dublin 12  
Republic of IRELAND  
TEL: (01) 4294444  
COSTA RICA  
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos  
Musicales  
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado  
10237,  
San Jose, COSTA RICA  
TEL: 258-0211  
MALAYSIA  
IRAN  
MOCO INC.  
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,  
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad  
Tehran, IRAN  
U. S. A.  
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.  
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,  
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling  
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA  
TEL: (03) 7805-3263  
Roland Corporation U.S.  
5100 S. Eastern Avenue  
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,  
U. S. A.  
Lima - Peru  
TEL: (511) 4461388  
TRINIDAD  
AMR Ltd  
Ground Floor  
Maritime Plaza  
Barataria Trinidad W.I.  
TEL: (868) 638 6385  
TEL: (021) 285-4169  
TEL: (323) 890 3700  
ITALY  
Roland Italy S. p. A.  
Viale delle Industrie 8,  
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY  
TEL: (02) 937-78300  
ISRAEL  
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons  
Ltd.  
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.  
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL  
TEL: (03) 6823666  
As of November 1, 2006 (ROLAND)  
04566667  
07-04-1N  
*
0
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
-
0
1
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pyramid Car Audio Power Supply PSV 40 User Guide
QSC Audio Car Speaker KW122 User Guide
Radica Games Board Games 75030 User Guide
Radio Shack Car Speaker PRO CSW800 User Guide
Radio Shack Portable Speaker XTS 36 User Guide
RCA MP3 Player MC43 Series User Guide
RCA VCR VGM300 User Guide
Roberts Radio Radio RD 8 User Guide
Sanyo Battery Charger UPF383456L User Guide
Seagate Computer Drive 9TN158 510 User Guide